1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
167 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
168 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
179 by the \SpecialChar LyX
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
187 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
188 Documentation mailing list:
189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
191 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
213 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
217 \begin_inset Note Note
220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
221 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
222 \begin_inset Newline newline
227 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
235 \begin_layout Standard
236 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
237 LatexCommand tableofcontents
244 \begin_layout Chapter
248 \begin_layout Section
249 What is \SpecialChar LyX
253 \begin_layout Standard
255 is a document preparation system.
256 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
257 scripts, publishable books, business
258 letters and proposals,
259 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
263 It is unlike most other
264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
273 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
289 pt type, left justified, 5
290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
299 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
303 \begin_layout Standard
304 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
309 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
313 \begin_layout Standard
318 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
319 's philosophy: most importantly,
320 the format of all of the manuals.
321 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
322 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
323 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
326 \begin_layout Section
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
333 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
335 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
336 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
342 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
343 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
345 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
346 only a vertical scrollbar.
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
351 The first case is large images.
352 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
353 the image and use the option
364 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
367 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
372 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
380 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
387 \begin_layout Section
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
394 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
396 Just select the manual you want to read from the
403 \begin_layout Section
404 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
408 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
415 \begin_layout Standard
416 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
417 can be configured via the menu
419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
423 \begin_inset Index idx
426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
433 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
436 packages are available.
437 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
439 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
440 was installed on your system,
441 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
446 \begin_inset space \space{}
449 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
450 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
452 To force \SpecialChar LyX
453 to re-inspect your system use
455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
459 \begin_inset Index idx
462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
469 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
470 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
473 \begin_layout Section
476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
478 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
487 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 installed but you will not be
490 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
491 or print your documents
495 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
496 Some \SpecialChar LyX
497 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 which can produce PDFs and the like.
509 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
514 every \SpecialChar LyX
515 document can still be output as plain text
516 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
522 \begin_layout Standard
523 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
529 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
530 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
533 \begin_layout Standard
534 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
535 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
536 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
539 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
547 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
548 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
574 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
578 \begin_layout Chapter
579 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
583 \begin_layout Section
584 Basic File Operations
585 \begin_inset Index idx
588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
597 \begin_layout Standard
602 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
603 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
606 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
644 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
650 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
684 \begin_layout Itemize
686 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
714 \begin_layout Itemize
716 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
724 \begin_layout Itemize
746 \begin_layout Itemize
758 arg "buffer-write-as"
762 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
766 \begin_layout Itemize
768 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
780 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
784 \begin_layout Itemize
786 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
794 \begin_layout Itemize
808 \begin_layout Itemize
822 \begin_layout Standard
823 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
824 few minor differences.
827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
838 command lists the available templates.
839 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
840 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
841 and possibly propose text fragments
843 for the document, features
844 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
847 you would otherwise need to
848 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
850 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
854 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
858 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
866 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
873 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
877 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
885 \begin_layout Standard
886 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
918 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
919 to open a file or create a new one, that big
920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
924 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
928 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
939 \begin_layout Standard
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
966 people work on the same document at the same time.
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
971 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
974 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
979 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
980 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
982 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
984 \begin_inset Flex Emph
987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
989 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
990 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
999 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1004 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1012 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1032 will reload the document from disk.
1033 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1034 and want to restore it to the last save
1035 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1042 \begin_inset space ~
1047 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1048 them as your changes.
1051 \begin_layout Section
1052 Basic Editing Features
1053 \begin_inset Index idx
1056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1065 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1072 \begin_layout Standard
1073 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1074 can perform cut and paste operations
1075 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1076 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1077 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1078 editing features and how to access
1080 We will start with cut and paste.
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 As you might expect, the
1088 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1089 various other editing features.
1090 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1094 \begin_layout Itemize
1100 \begin_inset Index idx
1103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1132 \begin_layout Itemize
1138 \begin_inset Index idx
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1170 \begin_layout Itemize
1176 \begin_inset Index idx
1179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1204 \begin_layout Itemize
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1214 \begin_layout Itemize
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1224 \begin_layout Itemize
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1250 \begin_inset Index idx
1253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1268 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1278 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1284 \begin_layout Standard
1285 The first three are self-explanatory.
1286 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1287 and other programs using
1308 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1309 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1314 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1315 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1316 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1317 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1318 into individual cells.
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1327 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1328 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1332 \begin_layout Standard
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1341 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1343 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1358 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1359 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1360 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1366 \begin_inset space \space{}
1369 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1370 text which is often meaningless.)
1373 \begin_layout Standard
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1380 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1390 \begin_inset space ~
1399 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1400 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1401 is inserted as one paragraph.
1402 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1411 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1412 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1418 \begin_inset space ~
1421 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1427 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1438 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1441 paste from the primary selection.
1442 This is normally the currently selected text.
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1448 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1472 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1474 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1478 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1481 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1486 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1500 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1506 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1508 \begin_inset space ~
1516 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1530 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1534 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1538 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1542 \begin_inset space ~
1554 arg "word-find-backward"
1557 shortcut) to search backwards
1561 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1562 Even if you close the widget,
1571 arg "word-find-backward"
1574 will search further.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1581 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1586 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1594 field and searches the next match.
1600 \begin_inset space ~
1605 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1607 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1609 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1615 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1616 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1628 \begin_inset space ~
1634 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1637 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1638 If the toggle is set, searching for
1639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1650 will not match the word
1651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1664 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1668 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1675 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1679 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1684 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1685 to only find complete words, e.
1686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1690 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1719 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1723 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1731 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1734 \begin_layout Itemize
1737 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1742 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1754 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1761 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1762 been reached without asking.
1763 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1764 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1765 so you need to put it back manually.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 \paragraph_spacing single
1771 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1772 The widget also has a
1776 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1777 widget), hiding replace and options.
1779 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1781 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1786 button brings you back to the full size.
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 \paragraph_spacing single
1793 also offers an advanced
1796 \begin_inset space ~
1800 \begin_inset space ~
1805 feature that is described in section
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1812 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1820 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1821 \begin_inset space \space{}
1825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1833 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1835 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1840 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1851 arg "inset-select-all"
1854 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1855 When the cursor is inside an inset
1858 arg "inset-select-all"
1861 selects the content of the inset.
1865 arg "inset-select-all"
1868 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1869 then to the whole document.
1873 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1876 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1880 \begin_layout Section
1882 \begin_inset Index idx
1885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1892 \begin_inset Index idx
1895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1904 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1911 \begin_layout Standard
1912 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1914 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 or the toolbar button
1927 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1932 or the toolbar button
1939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1946 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1950 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1953 \begin_layout Standard
1955 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1956 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1965 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1966 This is a consequence of the 100
1967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1970 step undo limit mentioned above.
1973 \begin_layout Standard
1982 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1984 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1988 \begin_layout Section
1990 \begin_inset Index idx
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2002 \begin_layout Standard
2003 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2006 \begin_layout Enumerate
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2016 once anywhere in the edit window.
2017 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2021 \begin_layout Enumerate
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2033 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2036 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2040 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2043 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2049 \begin_layout Itemize
2050 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2053 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2060 \begin_layout Enumerate
2061 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2066 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2067 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2071 \begin_layout Section
2073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2075 name "sec:Navigating"
2080 \begin_inset Index idx
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2094 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2097 \begin_layout Itemize
2102 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2103 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2106 \begin_layout Itemize
2107 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2109 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2111 \begin_inset space ~
2116 or by the toolbar button
2119 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2125 \begin_layout Itemize
2126 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2128 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2131 and use the same menu to return to them.
2132 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2135 \begin_layout Standard
2139 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2144 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2145 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2147 \begin_inset space ~
2152 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2153 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2154 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2155 last editing position.
2158 \begin_layout Standard
2163 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2167 \begin_layout Subsection
2169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2171 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2176 \begin_inset Index idx
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 Navigating ! Outline
2186 \begin_inset Index idx
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Standard
2199 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2200 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2201 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2208 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2212 ), notes, or citations (see section
2213 \begin_inset space ~
2217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2219 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2224 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2229 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2230 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2231 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2232 dialog and to modify the citation.
2235 \begin_layout Standard
2240 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2241 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2243 Labels and References
2245 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2254 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2259 control the display.
2264 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2265 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2270 option keeps it in the current view state.
2271 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2272 \begin_inset space ~
2275 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2276 \begin_inset space ~
2279 3, the subsections of sections
2280 \begin_inset space ~
2283 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2288 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2303 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2306 \begin_layout Standard
2313 button refreshes the TOC (
2314 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2316 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2320 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2322 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2326 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2334 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2338 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2344 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2346 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2350 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2352 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2356 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2360 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2362 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2366 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2370 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2374 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2378 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2382 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2386 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2390 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2394 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2396 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2400 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2414 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2415 For example, you can move section
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2420 \begin_inset space ~
2423 2.4 or after section
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2429 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2442 (or the corresponding key bindings
2450 ) you can change the level of sections.
2451 You can make section
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset space ~
2460 \begin_inset space ~
2466 \begin_layout Standard
2467 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2468 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2471 \begin_layout Subsection
2472 Horizontal Scrolling
2473 \begin_inset Index idx
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2477 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2485 \begin_layout Standard
2487 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2489 \begin_inset space ~
2492 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2493 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2494 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2498 \begin_layout Standard
2499 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2503 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 is used on a small tablet computer
2508 \begin_layout Itemize
2509 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_layout Itemize
2535 Math constructs with long command names
2538 \begin_layout Standard
2539 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2540 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2542 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2543 window so that table
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2550 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2555 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2557 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2558 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2561 \begin_layout Standard
2562 \begin_inset Float table
2569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2570 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2575 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2579 Horizontal scrolling test.
2587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2589 \begin_inset Tabular
2590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2591 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2636 \begin_layout Section
2637 Input/Word Completion
2638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2640 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2645 \begin_inset Index idx
2648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_inset Index idx
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2689 \begin_layout Standard
2691 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2693 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2694 is used to propose completions.
2697 \begin_layout Standard
2698 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2706 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2717 \begin_inset space ~
2722 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2731 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2732 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2742 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2743 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2744 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2745 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2748 \begin_layout Standard
2750 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2751 completions available.
2756 key to accept a proposed completion.
2757 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2758 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2759 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2762 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2769 \begin_layout Standard
2770 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2771 ing options for text.
2773 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2775 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2777 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2780 he special math option
2784 enables characters to be composed.
2786 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2788 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2792 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2795 you want to insert the character
2796 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2800 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2803 input the characters
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2816 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2818 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2822 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2829 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2834 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2839 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2842 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2847 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2853 's installation folder.
2855 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2856 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2863 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2868 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2869 In the example above,
2874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2906 \begin_layout Section
2908 \begin_inset Index idx
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2918 \begin_inset Index idx
2921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2950 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 \begin_layout Standard
2985 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2999 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3002 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3006 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3007 \begin_inset space ~
3011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3013 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3032 \begin_inset space ~
3053 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3057 \begin_layout Labeling
3058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3063 LatexCommand nomenclature
3065 description "Tabulator key"
3072 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3074 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3075 \begin_inset space ~
3079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3081 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3088 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3092 , especially section
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3099 reference "subsec:Lists"
3105 If you are still confused, look in the
3110 \begin_inset Newline newline
3118 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3119 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3123 \begin_layout Labeling
3124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3128 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3129 LatexCommand nomenclature
3131 description "Escape key"
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3146 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3147 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3150 \begin_layout Labeling
3151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3156 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3157 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 There are three modifier keys:
3165 \begin_layout Labeling
3166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3185 LatexCommand nomenclature
3187 description "Control key"
3192 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3193 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3197 \begin_layout Itemize
3206 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3209 \begin_layout Itemize
3218 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3221 \begin_layout Itemize
3230 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3234 \begin_layout Labeling
3235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3254 LatexCommand nomenclature
3256 description "Shift key"
3261 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3262 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3265 \begin_layout Labeling
3266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3284 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3285 LatexCommand nomenclature
3287 description "Alt or Meta key"
3292 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3293 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3294 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3300 \begin_inset Newline newline
3303 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3305 menu accelerator keys
3308 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3309 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 For example, the sequence
3315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3321 \begin_inset space ~
3325 \begin_inset space ~
3331 \begin_inset space ~
3339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3358 \begin_inset space ~
3364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3374 \begin_layout Standard
3379 manual lists all other things bound to the
3387 \begin_layout Standard
3388 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3390 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3392 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3393 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3395 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3396 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3397 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3399 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3415 followed by a capital
3422 \begin_layout Chapter
3425 \begin_inset Index idx
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_layout Section
3440 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 \begin_layout Subsection
3456 \begin_layout Standard
3457 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3458 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3459 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3460 numbering schemes, and so on.
3461 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3462 and format the title of your document differently.
3465 \begin_layout Standard
3470 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3471 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3472 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3473 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3474 picks one for you by default.
3475 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3478 \begin_layout Subsection
3480 \begin_inset Index idx
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3492 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You can select a class using the
3502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3507 \begin_inset Index idx
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3525 \begin_layout Standard
3526 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3531 \begin_layout Description
3532 Article for basic articles
3535 \begin_layout Description
3536 Report for basic reports
3539 \begin_layout Description
3540 Book for writing a book
3543 \begin_layout Description
3544 Letter for US-style letters
3547 \begin_layout Standard
3548 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3549 only uses if you have installed
3550 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3551 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3552 distributions will include
3554 Here are some of the classes.
3555 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3557 Special Document Classes
3566 \begin_layout Description
3567 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3570 \begin_layout Description
3571 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3575 \begin_layout Description
3576 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3580 \begin_layout Description
3581 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3582 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3583 There are three article layouts available.
3584 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3585 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3586 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3587 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3592 sequential numbering
3593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3596 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3597 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3598 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3599 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3602 \begin_layout Description
3603 Beamer Layout for presentations
3606 \begin_layout Description
3607 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3608 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3609 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3610 with \SpecialChar LyX
3614 \begin_layout Description
3615 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3618 \begin_layout Description
3620 \begin_inset space ~
3623 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3626 \begin_layout Description
3627 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3630 \begin_layout Description
3631 Foils Used to make transparencies
3634 \begin_layout Description
3635 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3636 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3637 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3638 with \SpecialChar LyX
3642 \begin_layout Description
3643 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3644 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3647 \begin_layout Description
3648 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3651 \begin_layout Description
3652 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3655 \begin_layout Description
3656 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3657 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3658 (Is used by this document.)
3661 \begin_layout Description
3662 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3665 \begin_layout Description
3666 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3669 \begin_layout Description
3674 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3675 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3677 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 Slides Used to make transparencies
3685 \begin_layout Description
3687 \begin_inset space ~
3690 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3691 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3694 \begin_layout Description
3695 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3701 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3703 Special Document Classes
3710 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3711 of the document classes.
3714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3724 \begin_inset Index idx
3727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3744 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3745 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3747 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3750 \begin_layout Standard
3753 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3758 , are highly specialized.
3760 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3761 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3762 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3763 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3764 by some document class.
3765 There are just too many of them.
3766 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3769 \begin_layout Standard
3770 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3778 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3779 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3780 document class for a new file.
3782 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3785 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3792 manual for information on how to install them.
3793 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3801 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3802 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3803 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3804 class files to be used for dissertation
3805 s submitted to those universities.
3806 The \SpecialChar LyX
3807 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3809 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3813 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3819 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3826 name "subsec:Modules"
3831 \begin_inset Index idx
3834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3844 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3845 chosen document class.
3846 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3847 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3858 \begin_inset Index idx
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3874 packages or file format converters that are not always
3875 installed by default.
3877 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3878 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3879 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3880 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3882 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3883 file without the missing prerequisites.
3884 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3885 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3888 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3892 \begin_inset Index idx
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3903 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3911 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3920 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3922 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3933 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3936 \begin_layout Standard
3937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3945 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3947 will advise you about these things.
3955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3964 \begin_inset Index idx
3967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 Document ! Local Layout
3976 \begin_layout Standard
3977 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3978 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3979 : They are intended to be used in
3980 a variety of different documents.
3981 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3982 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3983 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3984 need a specific inset or
3985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3987 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3990 style only that one time.
3991 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4011 manual for information on how to use it.
4014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4018 \begin_layout Standard
4019 Each class has a default set of options.
4020 Here's a quick table describing them:
4023 \begin_layout Standard
4024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4030 \begin_layout Standard
4032 \begin_inset Tabular
4033 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4034 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4493 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4500 \begin_layout Standard
4501 You're probably also wondering what
4502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4514 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4515 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4520 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4525 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4535 headings, there are also
4543 headings, and so on.
4544 We will describe these headings fully in section
4545 \begin_inset space ~
4549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4551 reference "subsec:Headings"
4558 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4562 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4567 \begin_inset Index idx
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4590 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4607 \begin_inset space ~
4612 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4614 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4615 doesn't support special options you want to
4616 use for your document.
4617 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4618 -class and its options, you have to read
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4624 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4628 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4632 \begin_inset space ~
4639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4645 \begin_inset space ~
4650 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4651 You can choose between the following five options:
4654 \begin_layout Labeling
4655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4660 Use default page style of current class.
4663 \begin_layout Labeling
4664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4669 No page numbers or headings.
4672 \begin_layout Labeling
4673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4681 \begin_layout Labeling
4682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4687 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4688 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4689 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4690 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4693 \begin_layout Labeling
4694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4699 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4700 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 \begin_inset Index idx
4709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 How they are defined is explained in section
4718 \begin_inset space ~
4722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4724 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4733 \begin_inset space ~
4737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4739 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4746 \begin_layout Subsection
4747 Paper Size and Orientation
4748 \begin_inset Index idx
4751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4752 Document ! Paper size
4758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4760 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4767 \begin_layout Standard
4768 You can find the following options in the menu
4771 \begin_inset space ~
4778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4782 \begin_inset Index idx
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 \begin_layout Labeling
4795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4799 \begin_inset space ~
4804 What size paper to print on.
4809 \begin_layout Itemize
4815 \begin_layout Itemize
4821 \begin_layout Itemize
4827 \begin_layout Itemize
4833 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 US letter, US legal, US executive
4839 \begin_layout Itemize
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4852 \begin_layout Labeling
4853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4858 To choose whether to output as
4869 \begin_layout Labeling
4870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4874 \begin_inset space ~
4879 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4880 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4883 \begin_layout Subsection
4885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4887 name "subsec:Margins"
4892 \begin_inset Index idx
4895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4902 \begin_inset Index idx
4905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4914 \begin_layout Standard
4915 Paper margins are set in the menu
4917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4921 \begin_inset Index idx
4924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 \begin_layout Standard
4934 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4935 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4936 the paper format and the font size into account.
4939 \begin_layout Subsection
4943 \begin_layout Standard
4944 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4945 has to convert everything into the new
4947 That includes the paragraph environments.
4948 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4949 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4950 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4952 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4961 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4963 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4964 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4965 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4968 \begin_layout Section
4969 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4970 \begin_inset Index idx
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 Paragraph ! Indentation
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4986 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4995 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5000 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5001 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5002 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5006 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5012 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5013 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5014 language than English.
5016 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5021 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5022 into \SpecialChar LyX
5024 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5027 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5029 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5030 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5031 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5039 goes to produce a printable file.
5044 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5046 gives you the ability globally to change
5050 these pre-coded spacings.
5051 We will explain more later.
5054 \begin_layout Subsection
5055 Paragraph Separation
5056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5058 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5063 \begin_inset Index idx
5066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5067 Paragraph ! Separation
5075 \begin_layout Standard
5083 \begin_inset space ~
5091 \begin_inset space ~
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 \begin_inset Index idx
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5114 \begin_layout Subsection
5118 \begin_layout Standard
5119 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5124 \begin_inset space ~
5129 dialog and toggle the
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5137 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5140 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5144 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5145 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5149 \begin_layout Standard
5150 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5151 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5154 \begin_layout Subsection
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5168 \begin_layout Standard
5171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5175 \begin_inset Index idx
5178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5191 \begin_inset space ~
5200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5217 installed to use this feature.
5222 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5231 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5232 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5235 \begin_layout Section
5236 Paragraph Environments
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5239 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5244 \begin_inset Index idx
5247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5248 Paragraph ! Environments
5254 \begin_inset Index idx
5257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5258 Paragraph environments|(
5266 \begin_layout Subsection
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5274 \begin_layout Standard
5283 } \SpecialChar ldots
5293 \begin_inset Newline newline
5296 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5298 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5299 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5300 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5309 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5312 \begin_layout Standard
5313 A paragraph environment is simply a
5314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5321 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5322 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5323 scheme, labels, and so on.
5324 Additionally, you can
5325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5332 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5333 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5334 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5335 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5337 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5339 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5342 \begin_layout Standard
5343 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5344 \begin_inset Graphics
5345 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5351 at the left end of the toolbar.
5353 will change the environment of the
5357 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5358 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5359 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5371 create a new paragraph using the
5375 paragraph environment.
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5384 because if you are in one of these environments:
5387 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5431 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5435 , rather than resetting it to
5440 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5441 \begin_inset space ~
5445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5447 reference "sec:Nesting"
5454 \begin_layout Subsection
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 The default paragraph environment is
5464 It creates a plain paragraph.
5466 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5467 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5468 this manual) are in the
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5476 You can nest a paragraph using the
5480 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5488 \begin_layout Subsection
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5504 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5513 for thanks or contact information.
5514 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5515 places all of this on a separate page
5516 along with today's date.
5517 For other types of documents, the title
5518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5525 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5530 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5544 Here's how you use them:
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 Put the title of your document in the
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 Put the author name in the
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5565 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5571 Note that using this environment is optional.
5572 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5573 will automatically insert today's date.
5574 If you don't want a date, use the option
5576 Suppress default date on front page
5580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5583 \begin_inset space ~
5591 \begin_layout Standard
5592 You can use footnotes to insert
5593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5600 or contact information.
5603 \begin_layout Subsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5617 name "subsec:Headings"
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5627 takes care of the numbering for you.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_inset Index idx
5635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5636 Section headings ! Numbered
5644 \begin_layout Standard
5645 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
5673 \begin_layout Enumerate
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
5685 \begin_layout Enumerate
5691 \begin_layout Standard
5693 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5694 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5695 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5696 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5698 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5700 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5706 \begin_layout Standard
5707 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5708 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5709 You group the book into chapters.
5711 does a similar grouping:
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 is divided into either
5730 \begin_layout Itemize
5742 \begin_layout Itemize
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5799 Not all document types use the
5803 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5808 is the top-level heading.
5816 \begin_layout Standard
5821 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5822 labels it with its number,
5823 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5825 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5839 \begin_inset Index idx
5842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5852 The unnumbered section headings have a
5853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5860 at the end of their name.
5861 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5862 the table of contents, see section
5863 \begin_inset space ~
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5877 Changing the Numbering
5878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5880 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5887 \begin_layout Standard
5888 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5889 in the Table of Contents.
5890 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5892 Just as certain classes start with
5906 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5916 This is something you can change.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset space ~
5947 you will see two counters.
5952 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5953 numbers a section heading.
5954 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5959 Short Titles of Headings
5960 \begin_inset Index idx
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 Section headings ! Short titles
5970 \begin_inset Argument 1
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5982 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5991 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5992 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5993 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5996 \begin_layout Standard
5998 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5999 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6000 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6001 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6006 \begin_inset space ~
6012 This will insert a box labeled
6013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6025 This also works for captions inside floats.
6026 There can only be one short title per title.
6029 \begin_layout Standard
6030 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6038 The following information applies to all section headings:
6041 \begin_layout Itemize
6042 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6045 \begin_layout Itemize
6046 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6049 \begin_layout Itemize
6050 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6053 \begin_layout Itemize
6054 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6057 \begin_layout Subsection
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6063 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6077 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6078 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6079 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6080 the text they contain.
6081 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6089 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6092 \begin_layout Standard
6093 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6102 when you start a new paragraph.
6103 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6107 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6108 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6109 have to change back to the
6113 environment yourself.
6116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6125 \begin_inset Index idx
6128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6137 \begin_layout Standard
6138 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6139 time for the differences.
6148 are identical except for one difference:
6152 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6161 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 Here's an example of the
6178 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6180 See – no indentation!
6184 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6185 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6186 the other paragraph.
6189 \begin_layout Standard
6190 Here's another example, this time in the
6197 \begin_layout Quotation
6203 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6204 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6205 the first line, then
6209 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6213 you were quoting other text.
6216 \begin_layout Quotation
6217 Here's a new paragraph.
6218 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6219 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6222 \begin_layout Standard
6223 As the examples show,
6227 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6228 They should put quotes in the
6233 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6237 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6242 \begin_inset Index idx
6245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6252 \begin_inset Index idx
6255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6271 \begin_layout Standard
6276 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6282 \begin_inset Newline newline
6285 Which I did not rehearse!
6289 It could be much worse.
6290 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6292 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6293 indented a bit more than the first.
6294 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6300 \begin_inset Newline newline
6303 And make things look fine
6304 \begin_inset Newline newline
6310 arg "newline-insert newline"
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6321 does not indent both margins.
6322 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6323 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6326 arg "newline-insert newline"
6332 \begin_layout Subsection
6334 \begin_inset Index idx
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6355 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6365 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6366 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6375 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6376 lets you provide your own label.
6377 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6378 describing some general features of all four of them.
6381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6385 \begin_layout Standard
6386 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6388 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6389 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6398 reset the environment to
6402 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6403 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6404 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6412 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6419 \begin_layout Standard
6420 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6421 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6422 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6424 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6425 you read all of section
6426 \begin_inset space ~
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6432 reference "sec:Nesting"
6439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6441 \begin_inset Index idx
6444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6460 \begin_layout Standard
6461 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6465 paragraph environment.
6466 It has the following properties:
6469 \begin_layout Itemize
6470 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6474 \begin_layout Itemize
6476 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6479 \begin_layout Itemize
6480 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6484 \begin_layout Itemize
6485 The items can have any length.
6487 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6488 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6495 \begin_layout Itemize
6500 environment inside another
6504 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6508 \begin_layout Itemize
6509 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6512 \begin_layout Itemize
6514 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6517 \begin_layout Itemize
6519 \begin_inset space ~
6523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6525 reference "sec:Nesting"
6529 for a full explanation of nesting.
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6534 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6543 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6547 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6548 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6551 \begin_layout Itemize
6552 The label for the first level
6556 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6561 The label for the second level is a dash.
6565 \begin_layout Itemize
6566 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6570 \begin_layout Itemize
6571 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6575 \begin_layout Itemize
6576 Back out to the third level.
6580 \begin_layout Itemize
6581 Back to the second level.
6585 \begin_layout Itemize
6586 Back to the outermost level.
6589 \begin_layout Standard
6590 These are the default labels for an
6595 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6600 dialog in the submenu
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6614 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6620 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6628 reference "sec:Nesting"
6635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6637 \begin_inset Index idx
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6649 name "sec:Enumerate"
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6661 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6662 It has these properties:
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6675 \begin_layout Enumerate
6677 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 environment resets the counter to one.
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_layout Enumerate
6702 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6703 Items can have any length.
6706 \begin_layout Enumerate
6707 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6710 \begin_layout Enumerate
6711 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6714 \begin_layout Enumerate
6715 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6719 \begin_layout Standard
6728 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6730 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6731 labels the four different levels in an
6738 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 The first level of an
6743 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6747 \begin_layout Enumerate
6748 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6753 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 Back to the third level
6772 \begin_layout Enumerate
6773 Back to the second level.
6777 \begin_layout Enumerate
6778 Back to the outermost level.
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6786 environment, see section
6787 \begin_inset space ~
6791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6793 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6798 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6802 \begin_layout Standard
6803 There is more to nesting
6807 environments than we've stated here.
6808 You should read section
6809 \begin_inset space ~
6813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6815 reference "sec:Nesting"
6819 to learn more about nesting.
6822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6824 \begin_inset Index idx
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6841 list has no fixed label.
6842 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6851 of the first line as the label.
6855 \begin_layout Description
6856 Example: This is an example of the
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6865 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6878 it is meant that the first usage of the
6882 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6884 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6892 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6898 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6900 \begin_inset space ~
6906 \begin_inset space ~
6910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6912 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6916 for more information.) Here is an example:
6919 \begin_layout Description
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6924 Example: This one shows how to use a
6927 \begin_inset space ~
6939 \begin_layout Description
6940 Usage: You should use the
6944 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6945 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6947 It's not a good idea to use a
6951 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6952 You're better off using
6964 paragraphs into them.
6967 \begin_layout Description
6968 Nesting: You can nest
6972 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6978 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6979 them from the first line.
6982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6984 \begin_inset Index idx
6987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Standard
7001 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7002 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7015 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7017 Here are its properties:
7020 \begin_layout Labeling
7021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7023 \begin_inset space ~
7026 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7035 of each line as the item label.
7040 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7041 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7042 space as described above.
7045 \begin_layout Labeling
7046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7047 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7048 uses different margins for the item label and the
7049 body of the item text.
7050 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7051 label width plus a little extra space.
7054 \begin_layout Labeling
7055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7057 \begin_inset space ~
7060 width \SpecialChar LyX
7061 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7062 If the label width is larger, the label
7063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7070 into the first line.
7071 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7072 margin of the rest of the item text.
7075 \begin_layout Labeling
7076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7078 \begin_inset space ~
7081 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7086 environment has the same left margin.
7087 \begin_inset Newline newline
7090 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7095 \begin_inset space ~
7100 dialog (toolbar button
7103 arg "layout-paragraph"
7110 \begin_inset space ~
7115 determines the default label width.
7116 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7125 multiple times instead.
7126 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7136 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7139 \begin_inset space ~
7144 every time you alter a label in a
7149 \begin_inset Newline newline
7152 The predefined default width is the length of
7153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7161 \begin_inset space ~
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7172 list the same way as the
7176 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7182 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7191 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7192 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7194 \begin_inset space ~
7198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7200 reference "sec:Nesting"
7204 to learn about nesting.
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 There is yet another feature of the
7212 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7213 left-justifies the item labels by
7215 You can use additional
7219 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7220 justifies the item label.
7225 are documented in section
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7232 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7237 Here are some examples:
7240 \begin_layout Labeling
7241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7242 Left The default for
7249 \begin_layout Labeling
7250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7258 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7261 \begin_layout Labeling
7262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7274 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7277 \begin_layout Subsection
7279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7281 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7286 \begin_inset Index idx
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7298 \begin_layout Standard
7299 The features described in this section require that the module
7301 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7303 is loaded in the document settings.
7304 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7324 Custom Enumerate Lists
7325 \begin_inset Index idx
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7339 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7345 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7346 There you add the command
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7371 Code, look at section
7372 \begin_inset space ~
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7378 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7391 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7398 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7399 For capital Roman numerals replace
7411 in the command above.
7412 For Arabic numerals use
7420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7427 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7452 You can only number 26
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7456 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7466 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7470 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7473 \begin_layout Enumerate
7474 \begin_inset Argument 1
7477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7504 \begin_inset Argument 1
7507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_layout Enumerate
7535 \begin_layout Enumerate
7536 \begin_inset Argument 1
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_inset Argument 1
7567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_layout Standard
7594 For this list these commands were used:
7597 \begin_layout Standard
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7624 \begin_inset Newline newline
7634 \begin_layout Standard
7641 makes the label emphasized and
7650 \begin_layout Standard
7651 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7659 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7660 lists until you change the definition.
7668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7670 \begin_inset Index idx
7673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7674 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7682 \begin_layout Standard
7683 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7686 \begin_layout Enumerate
7687 \begin_inset Argument 1
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset Note Note
7712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 goes back to default numbering
7721 \begin_layout Enumerate
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7734 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7740 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7741 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7742 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7743 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7744 , but in the output.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7758 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7770 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7771 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7772 of a normal enumeration.
7773 There, insert the command
7776 \begin_layout Standard
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7787 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7791 \begin_layout Enumerate
7795 \begin_layout Enumerate
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7803 \begin_layout Enumerate
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7823 This enumeration starts at 4
7826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7828 \begin_inset Index idx
7831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7843 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7846 \begin_layout Itemize
7850 \begin_layout Itemize
7851 with standard spacing
7854 \begin_layout Standard
7855 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7857 Add there the command
7861 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7864 \begin_layout Itemize
7865 \begin_inset Argument 1
7868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7887 \begin_layout Itemize
7891 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7896 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7903 \begin_inset Index idx
7906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7914 For more information see its documentation,
7915 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7928 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7929 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7933 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7936 \begin_layout Enumerate
7937 \begin_inset Argument 1
7940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7948 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7961 \begin_layout Enumerate
7962 with negative indentation
7965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7966 Further Customization
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7971 Lists ! Customization
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 You can also change the style of description lists.
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7990 \begin_layout Standard
7991 changes the description label font, the command
7994 \begin_layout Standard
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8001 sets the list style.
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8005 An example where the command
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8013 itshape, style=nextline
8016 \begin_layout Standard
8020 \begin_layout Description
8022 \begin_inset space ~
8026 \begin_inset Argument 1
8029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8037 itshape, style=nextline
8047 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8048 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8052 \begin_layout Description
8054 \begin_inset space ~
8057 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8058 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8059 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8063 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8069 \begin_inset Index idx
8072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8080 For more information see its documentation
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8091 \begin_layout Subsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8107 \begin_inset space ~
8110 Address: An Overview
8113 \begin_layout Standard
8114 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8115 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8123 \begin_inset space ~
8129 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8130 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 gags on the document.
8132 In contrast, you can use the
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8144 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8145 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 Of course, you're not limited to using
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8166 \begin_inset space ~
8171 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8172 some European academic papers.
8175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8179 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8191 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8192 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8196 \begin_inset space ~
8201 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8202 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8203 Here's an example of each:
8206 \begin_layout Right Address
8208 \begin_inset Newline newline
8212 \begin_inset Newline newline
8216 \begin_inset Newline newline
8219 When is it? What is today?
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8226 \begin_inset space ~
8232 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8234 the largest block of text on a single line.
8235 Here's an example of the
8242 \begin_layout Address
8244 \begin_inset Newline newline
8247 Where do I send this
8248 \begin_inset Newline newline
8251 Your post office and country
8254 \begin_layout Standard
8255 As you can see, both
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8267 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8272 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8273 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8279 This makes sense, since
8287 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8288 Thus, you have to use
8295 arg "newline-insert newline"
8300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 ) to start a new line in an
8319 \begin_inset space ~
8327 \begin_layout Subsection
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8333 or list of references.
8335 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8340 \begin_inset Index idx
8343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8357 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8358 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8359 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8360 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8364 in anything else or vice versa.
8370 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8371 The book document classes ignores the
8375 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8379 in a letter document class.
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8387 environment does several things for you.
8388 First, it puts the centered label
8389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8397 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8399 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8400 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8401 the subsequent text.
8402 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8404 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8409 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8413 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8414 The new paragraph will still be in the
8419 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8420 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 \begin_inset Float figure
8431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8433 \begin_inset Graphics
8434 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8442 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8447 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 We would love to demonstrate the
8473 environment, but since this document is in the
8474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8481 class, we can't do this.
8482 We inserted it therefore as figure
8483 \begin_inset space ~
8487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8489 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8494 If you have never heard of an
8495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8502 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8507 \begin_inset Index idx
8510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8519 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8531 environment is used to list references.
8532 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8533 only use it at the end of the document.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 When you first open a
8550 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8551 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8567 depending on the document class.
8568 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8569 Each paragraph of the
8573 environment is a bibliography entry.
8578 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8579 Each new paragraph is still in the
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8588 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8590 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8592 handling, have a look at section
8593 \begin_inset space ~
8597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8599 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8606 \begin_layout Subsection
8607 Special Environments
8610 \begin_layout Standard
8612 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8613 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8621 \begin_inset Index idx
8624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8634 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8641 \begin_layout Standard
8647 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8649 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8654 key as a fixed whitespace.
8658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8671 \begin_inset space ~
8676 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8694 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8697 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8700 arg "newline-insert newline"
8717 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8718 So, when you finish using the
8723 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8724 Also, you can nest the
8729 environment inside of others.
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 arg "newline-insert newline"
8743 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8748 \begin_inset space \space{}
8758 arg "newline-insert newline"
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 arg "newline-insert newline"
8778 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8786 You must put at least one
8790 in any line you want blank.
8791 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8796 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8800 since that will insert
8805 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8808 arg "self-insert \""
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8822 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8826 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8830 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8834 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8835 printf("Hello World!
8840 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8844 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 This is just the standard
8850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8866 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8868 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8869 as if you used a typewriter.
8870 \begin_inset Index idx
8873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8874 Paragraph environments|)
8879 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8882 Program Code Listings
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8899 \begin_inset Index idx
8902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8916 environment is similar to the
8921 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8922 computer console text.
8927 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8941 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8942 you can have empty lines.
8955 \begin_layout Itemize
8956 have a certain language and a text style
8959 \begin_layout Itemize
8960 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8961 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8962 and \SpecialChar TeX
8966 \begin_layout Standard
8967 Because of these properties
8971 works like a typewriter.
8975 \begin_layout Verbatim
8979 \begin_layout Verbatim
8982 The following 2 lines are empty:
8985 \begin_layout Verbatim
8989 \begin_layout Verbatim
8993 \begin_layout Verbatim
8994 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9004 environment is identical to
9008 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9009 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9016 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9020 \begin_layout Section
9021 Nesting Environments
9022 \begin_inset Index idx
9025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9026 Nesting ! Environments
9032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9041 \begin_layout Subsection
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9049 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9051 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9053 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9065 \begin_layout Enumerate
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9074 \begin_layout Enumerate
9078 \begin_layout Enumerate
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9087 \begin_layout Standard
9088 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9089 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9091 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9093 \begin_inset space ~
9097 \begin_inset space ~
9105 \begin_inset space ~
9109 \begin_inset space ~
9114 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9116 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9119 arg "depth-increment"
9125 arg "depth-decrement"
9139 arg "depth-increment"
9145 arg "depth-decrement"
9149 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9150 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9156 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9157 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9158 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9159 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9162 \begin_layout Standard
9163 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9165 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9167 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9170 \begin_layout Subsection
9171 What You Can and Can't Nest
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9176 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9181 than a simple yes or no.
9182 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9185 \begin_layout Itemize
9186 Completely unnestable
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9190 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9194 \begin_layout Itemize
9195 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9200 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9201 environments have them:
9204 \begin_layout Description
9205 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9206 Can't nest into them.
9210 \begin_layout Itemize
9216 \begin_layout Itemize
9222 \begin_layout Itemize
9228 \begin_layout Itemize
9234 \begin_layout Itemize
9241 \begin_layout Description
9243 \begin_inset space ~
9246 Nestable You can nest them.
9247 You can nest other things into them.
9251 \begin_layout Itemize
9257 \begin_layout Itemize
9263 \begin_layout Itemize
9269 \begin_layout Itemize
9275 \begin_layout Itemize
9281 \begin_layout Itemize
9287 \begin_layout Itemize
9293 \begin_layout Itemize
9300 \begin_layout Itemize
9306 \begin_layout Itemize
9313 \begin_layout Description
9314 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9315 You can't nest anything into them.
9319 \begin_layout Itemize
9325 \begin_layout Itemize
9331 \begin_layout Itemize
9337 \begin_layout Itemize
9343 \begin_layout Itemize
9349 \begin_layout Itemize
9355 \begin_layout Itemize
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 \begin_layout Itemize
9385 \begin_layout Itemize
9391 \begin_layout Itemize
9397 \begin_layout Itemize
9401 \begin_inset space ~
9407 \begin_layout Itemize
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9423 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9433 \begin_inset space ~
9436 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9437 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9438 nested section headings violate this.
9446 \begin_layout Subsection
9447 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9448 \begin_inset Index idx
9451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9452 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9462 affected by nesting anyhow.
9466 \begin_layout Itemize
9470 \begin_layout Itemize
9474 \begin_layout Itemize
9478 \begin_layout Standard
9480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9488 Figures and tables in
9492 are not affected by this.
9497 Have a look at section
9498 \begin_inset space ~
9502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9504 reference "sec:Floats"
9508 for more information about
9515 \begin_layout Standard
9517 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9518 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9523 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9531 of its own, it behaves just like a
9532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9539 paragraph environment.
9540 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9544 \begin_layout Standard
9545 Here's an example with a table:
9548 \begin_layout Enumerate
9553 \begin_layout Enumerate
9554 This is (a) and it's nested.
9558 \begin_layout Standard
9559 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9565 \begin_layout Standard
9567 \begin_inset Tabular
9568 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9569 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9655 \begin_layout Standard
9656 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9663 \begin_layout Enumerate
9665 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9669 \begin_layout Enumerate
9673 \begin_layout Standard
9674 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9677 \begin_layout Enumerate
9682 \begin_layout Enumerate
9683 This is (a) and it's nested.
9687 \begin_layout Standard
9688 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9694 \begin_layout Standard
9696 \begin_inset Tabular
9697 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9698 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9699 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9784 \begin_layout Standard
9785 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9791 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9801 \begin_layout Enumerate
9805 \begin_layout Standard
9806 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9810 \begin_layout Standard
9811 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9814 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9817 \begin_layout Enumerate
9822 \begin_layout Enumerate
9823 This is (a) and it's nested.
9826 \begin_layout Standard
9827 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9835 \begin_inset Tabular
9836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9837 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9924 \begin_layout Standard
9925 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9944 \begin_layout Standard
9945 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9951 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9952 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9956 \begin_layout Subsection
9957 Usage and General Features
9960 \begin_layout Standard
9961 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9962 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9971 is the innermost possible depth.
9972 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9975 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 level #1 – outermost
9980 \begin_layout Enumerate
9985 \begin_layout Enumerate
9990 \begin_layout Enumerate
9995 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 \begin_layout Itemize
10009 \begin_layout Standard
10010 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10011 both of them in the example.
10012 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10022 For example, if we tried to nest another
10027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10034 , we would get errors.
10037 \begin_layout Subsection
10039 \begin_inset Index idx
10042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10051 \begin_layout Standard
10052 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10053 We have several examples of nested environments.
10054 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10059 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10062 \begin_layout Labeling
10063 \labelwidthstring MMM
10064 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10073 \begin_layout Labeling
10074 \labelwidthstring MMM
10075 #2-a This is level #2.
10076 We created it by using
10079 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10085 arg "depth-increment"
10092 \begin_layout Labeling
10093 \labelwidthstring MMM
10094 #3-a This is level #3.
10095 This time, we just enter
10102 arg "depth-increment"
10106 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10116 arg "depth-increment"
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10128 environment, nested inside of
10129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10137 So, it's at level #4.
10138 We did this by entering
10141 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10147 arg "depth-increment"
10150 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10155 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10171 \begin_layout Standard
10176 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10179 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10185 \begin_layout Labeling
10186 \labelwidthstring MMM
10187 #4-a This is level #4.
10191 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10194 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10199 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10203 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10208 keep nesting things inside
10209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10220 \begin_layout Labeling
10221 \labelwidthstring MMM
10222 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10227 \begin_layout Labeling
10228 \labelwidthstring MMM
10229 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10230 and this is level #6.
10231 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10235 \begin_layout Labeling
10236 \labelwidthstring MMM
10237 #5-b Back to level #5.
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 arg "depth-decrement"
10254 \begin_layout Labeling
10255 \labelwidthstring MMM
10259 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10268 , we're back at level #4.
10272 \begin_layout Labeling
10273 \labelwidthstring MMM
10274 #3-b Back to level #3.
10275 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10279 \begin_layout Labeling
10280 \labelwidthstring MMM
10281 #2-b Back to level #2.
10285 \begin_layout Labeling
10286 \labelwidthstring MMM
10287 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10288 After this sentence, we will enter
10292 and change the paragraph environment back to
10299 \begin_layout Standard
10300 We could have also used the
10316 environment in place of the
10321 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10325 Example 2: Inheritance
10328 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10329 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10332 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10341 arg "depth-increment"
10345 \begin_inset Newline newline
10348 which, we will change to the
10356 \begin_layout Enumerate
10361 environment, at level #2.
10364 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 Notice how the nested
10369 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10373 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10377 \begin_layout Standard
10378 We ended this example by entering
10383 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10387 and reset the nesting depth by using
10390 arg "depth-decrement"
10396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10397 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10406 \begin_inset Argument 1
10409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10410 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10418 \begin_layout Enumerate
10419 This is level #1, in an
10423 paragraph environment.
10424 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10428 \begin_layout Enumerate
10433 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10439 arg "depth-increment"
10443 Now, what happens if we nest an
10447 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10448 label be? An asterisk?
10452 \begin_layout Itemize
10462 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10463 So, its label is a bullet.
10464 (We got here by using
10467 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10473 arg "depth-increment"
10476 , then changing the environment to
10484 \begin_layout Itemize
10485 Here's level #4, produced using
10488 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10494 arg "depth-increment"
10498 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 to get to level #5.
10506 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10511 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10515 , because we are in the
10523 environment (that is, it is an
10538 \begin_layout Enumerate
10543 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10544 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10548 \begin_layout Enumerate
10549 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10552 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10555 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10558 \begin_layout Enumerate
10562 arg "depth-decrement"
10565 to decrease the depth after the next
10568 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10575 \begin_layout Enumerate
10577 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10582 \begin_layout Enumerate
10584 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10585 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10589 \begin_layout Enumerate
10590 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10599 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10604 reset the counter for the label.
10608 \begin_layout Enumerate
10612 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10618 arg "depth-decrement"
10621 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10622 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10623 into the twofold-nested
10631 \begin_layout Enumerate
10632 The same thing happens if we do another
10635 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10641 arg "depth-decrement"
10644 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10647 \begin_layout Standard
10648 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10653 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10664 The number of other
10668 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10675 The same rule applies for the
10679 environment, as well.
10682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10683 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10686 \begin_layout Enumerate
10687 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10688 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10689 the same detail with how we did it.
10698 \begin_layout Standard
10706 arg "depth-increment"
10713 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10714 the example in parentheses someplace.
10715 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10716 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10717 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10721 \begin_layout Enumerate
10726 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10730 \begin_layout Verse
10731 Now we will add verse.
10732 \begin_inset Newline newline
10735 It will get much worse.
10736 \begin_inset Newline newline
10746 arg "depth-increment"
10756 \begin_layout Verse
10757 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10758 \begin_inset Newline newline
10761 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10762 \begin_inset Newline newline
10768 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10776 \begin_layout Verse
10777 Here comes a table:
10781 \begin_layout Standard
10782 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10788 \begin_layout Standard
10790 \begin_inset Tabular
10791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10792 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10793 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10879 \begin_layout Verse
10883 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10893 arg "depth-increment"
10899 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10905 \begin_inset Newline newline
10913 arg "depth-decrement"
10920 \begin_layout Enumerate
10925 : level #1) This is another item.
10926 Note that selecting a
10930 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10931 3 times to put the table inside the
10938 \begin_layout Quotation
10939 We're now ending the
10943 list and changing to
10948 We're still at level #1.
10949 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10950 The next set of paragraphs is a
10951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10958 We will nest both the
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10970 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10974 for the letter body.
10978 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10981 to preserve the depth.
10982 Remember that you need to use
10985 arg "newline-insert newline"
10988 to create multiple lines inside the
10995 \begin_inset space ~
11005 \begin_layout Right Address
11007 \begin_inset Newline newline
11010 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11011 \begin_inset Newline newline
11017 \begin_layout Address
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_layout Quotation
11026 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11030 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11031 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11032 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11033 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11034 as soon as possible.
11035 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11038 \begin_layout Quotation
11039 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11040 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11041 with your order, along with payment.
11044 \begin_layout Quotation
11045 We thank you again for your patience.
11048 \begin_layout Address
11050 \begin_inset Newline newline
11057 \begin_layout Quotation
11058 That ends that example!
11061 \begin_layout Standard
11062 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11063 gives you a lot of power with just
11065 We could have easily nested an
11086 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11089 \begin_layout Subsection
11091 \begin_inset Index idx
11094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11095 Nesting ! Separation
11101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11103 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11110 \begin_layout Standard
11111 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11113 For example you need two different enumerations:
11116 \begin_layout Enumerate
11121 \begin_layout Enumerate
11126 \begin_layout Enumerate
11130 \begin_layout Standard
11131 \begin_inset Separator plain
11137 \begin_layout Itemize
11143 \begin_layout Standard
11144 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11150 \begin_layout Enumerate
11154 \begin_layout Enumerate
11158 \begin_layout Enumerate
11162 \begin_layout Standard
11163 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11164 list item and use the menu
11166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11167 Separated <Name> Above
11171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11172 Separated <Name> Below
11175 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11176 ) and before or behind it the
11178 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11181 \begin_layout Standard
11182 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11183 (red arrow in LyX).
11184 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11185 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11189 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11192 arg "paragraph-break"
11199 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11202 \begin_layout Section
11203 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11204 \begin_inset Index idx
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11216 \begin_layout Standard
11217 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11218 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11220 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11221 be broken at the end of a line.
11222 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11226 \begin_layout Subsection
11228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11230 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11235 \begin_inset Index idx
11238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11247 \begin_layout Standard
11248 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11249 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11250 ) not to break the line at
11252 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11255 \begin_layout Quote
11256 Further documentation is given in section
11257 \begin_inset Newline newline
11261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11263 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11270 \begin_layout Standard
11271 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11286 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11295 A protected space is set with
11297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11298 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11300 \begin_inset space ~
11308 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11314 \begin_layout Subsection
11316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11318 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11323 \begin_inset Index idx
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11327 Spacing ! Horizontal
11335 \begin_layout Standard
11336 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11339 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11343 The length units are listed in Appendix
11344 \begin_inset space ~
11348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11350 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11361 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11366 \begin_inset Index idx
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11370 Spaces ! Inter-word
11378 \begin_layout Standard
11379 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11380 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11381 at the ends of sentences.
11382 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11383 automatically takes care about this.
11384 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11385 followed by a period; see section
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11392 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11397 To insert a normal space, select
11399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11400 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11402 \begin_inset space ~
11410 arg "space-insert normal"
11416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11420 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11425 \begin_inset Index idx
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11446 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11455 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11456 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11457 inside abbreviations:
11460 \begin_layout Quote
11462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11466 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11470 or between values and units.
11471 Compare for example this:
11472 \begin_inset Newline newline
11476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11480 \begin_inset Newline newline
11483 10 kg (normal space
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11490 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11492 \begin_inset space ~
11500 arg "space-insert thin"
11506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11511 You can also insert the following space types:
11514 \begin_layout Description
11516 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11528 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11532 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11536 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11538 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11541 space between the arrows.
11542 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11546 \begin_layout Description
11548 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11550 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11557 space A line with a
11558 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11562 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11566 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11570 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11572 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11575 space between the arrows.
11578 \begin_layout Description
11580 \begin_inset space ~
11584 \begin_inset space ~
11587 space A line with a
11588 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11592 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11596 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11599 negative thin space between the arrows.
11602 \begin_layout Description
11604 \begin_inset space ~
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11611 space A line with a
11612 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11616 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11620 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11623 negative medium space between the arrows.
11626 \begin_layout Description
11628 \begin_inset space ~
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11635 space A line with a
11636 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11640 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11644 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11647 negative thick space between the arrows.
11650 \begin_layout Description
11652 \begin_inset space ~
11656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11660 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11664 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11668 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11672 \begin_inset space ~
11676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11679 em) space between the arrows.
11682 \begin_layout Description
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11692 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11696 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11700 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11704 \begin_inset space ~
11708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11711 em) space between the arrows.
11714 \begin_layout Description
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11724 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11728 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11732 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11736 \begin_inset space ~
11740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11743 em) space between the arrows.
11746 \begin_layout Description
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11752 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11756 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11761 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11768 cm space between the arrows.
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11779 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11783 lists the different space sizes.
11786 \begin_layout Standard
11787 \begin_inset Float table
11794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11800 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11804 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 \begin_inset Tabular
11815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11816 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11915 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11921 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11943 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11960 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11990 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset Index idx
12152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12161 \begin_layout Standard
12162 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12163 feature for adding extra space
12164 in a uniform fashion.
12165 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12166 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12167 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12168 equally between themselves.
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12175 \begin_layout Quote
12177 This is on the left side
12178 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12181 This is on the right
12184 \begin_layout Quote
12187 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12197 \begin_layout Quote
12200 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12204 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12208 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12215 That was an example in the
12221 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12225 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12229 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12232 is one in a standard paragraph.
12233 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12237 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12249 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12252 \begin_layout Standard
12254 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_layout Standard
12266 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_layout Standard
12278 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12288 \begin_layout Standard
12290 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12294 \begin_inset space ~
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12302 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12304 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12308 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12309 (= opened downwards)
12312 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12316 \begin_inset space ~
12322 \begin_layout Standard
12324 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12326 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12330 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12334 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12338 \begin_inset space ~
12344 \begin_layout Standard
12345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12357 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12359 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12360 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12364 option in the space dialog.
12372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12376 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12381 \begin_inset Index idx
12384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12394 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12395 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12402 What is correct English?:
12403 \begin_inset Newline newline
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12414 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12415 \begin_inset Newline newline
12419 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12430 \begin_inset Newline newline
12434 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12451 \begin_layout Standard
12453 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12458 \begin_inset space ~
12462 \begin_inset space ~
12466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12470 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12473 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12477 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12494 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12503 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12504 That is why it is named
12505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12513 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12514 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12518 \begin_layout Subsection
12520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12522 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12527 \begin_inset Index idx
12530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 \begin_layout Standard
12540 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12542 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12543 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12551 There you find the following sizes:
12554 \begin_layout Standard
12567 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12568 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12573 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12584 \begin_inset Index idx
12587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12588 Document ! Settings
12593 for the paragraph separation.
12594 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12603 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12609 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12618 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12619 size including line spacing.
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12630 \begin_inset Index idx
12633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12640 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12645 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12646 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12655 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12664 s are described in section
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12671 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12680 If there are several
12684 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12685 You can therefore use
12689 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12697 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12698 \begin_inset space ~
12702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12704 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12711 \begin_layout Standard
12712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12723 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12735 \begin_layout Subsection
12736 Paragraph Alignment
12737 \begin_inset Index idx
12740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12741 Paragraph ! Alignment
12749 \begin_layout Standard
12750 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12752 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12755 dialog (toolbar button
12758 arg "layout-paragraph"
12762 There are five possibilities:
12765 \begin_layout Itemize
12773 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12779 \begin_layout Itemize
12787 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12793 \begin_layout Itemize
12801 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12807 \begin_layout Itemize
12815 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12821 \begin_layout Itemize
12829 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12835 \begin_layout Standard
12836 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12837 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12838 the left and right margins.
12839 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12842 \begin_layout Standard
12844 This paragraph is right aligned,
12847 \begin_layout Standard
12849 this one is centered,
12852 \begin_layout Standard
12854 this one is left aligned.
12857 \begin_layout Subsection
12859 \begin_inset Index idx
12862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12863 Page breaks ! Forced
12869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12871 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12878 \begin_layout Standard
12879 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12880 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12881 force a page break where you want one.
12882 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12883 is good at page breaking.
12884 Only if you use a lot of
12888 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12889 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12893 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12894 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12898 have to change the page breaking.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12902 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12904 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12907 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12915 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12918 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12927 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12928 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12932 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12933 at the top of a page.
12934 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12936 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12937 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12938 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12942 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12946 to learn more about
12953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12957 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12962 \begin_inset Index idx
12965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12966 Page breaks ! Clear
12974 \begin_layout Standard
12975 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12976 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12977 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12978 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12979 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12982 \begin_layout Standard
12983 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12986 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12994 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12997 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12999 \begin_inset space ~
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13008 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13009 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13010 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13016 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13017 Suppressing Page Breaks
13020 \begin_inset Index idx
13023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13025 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13029 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13038 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13042 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13047 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13051 \begin_layout Standard
13053 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13054 To discourage page break at
13055 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13057 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13058 certain point you can use
13062 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13064 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13067 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13069 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13076 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13077 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13078 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13079 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13084 \begin_layout Subsection
13086 \begin_inset Index idx
13089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13098 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13105 \begin_layout Standard
13106 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13108 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13111 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13113 \begin_inset space ~
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13125 arg "newline-insert newline"
13129 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13132 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13146 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13149 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13151 This is useful to avoid
13152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13159 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13162 \begin_layout Standard
13163 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13164 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13166 very good at line breaking.
13167 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13168 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13175 reference "sec:Quote"
13180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13182 reference "sec:Verse"
13187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13189 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13196 \begin_layout Subsection
13198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13200 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13205 \begin_inset Index idx
13208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13219 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13230 \begin_layout Standard
13234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13235 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13242 you can insert horizontal lines.
13243 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13244 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13245 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13248 \begin_layout Standard
13250 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13261 \begin_layout Section
13262 Characters and Symbols
13265 \begin_layout Standard
13266 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13267 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13268 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13276 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13280 for information on how this is done.
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13289 dialog via the menu
13291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13292 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13298 \begin_layout Standard
13299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13308 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13310 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13318 \begin_layout Section
13319 Fonts and Text Styles
13320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13322 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13329 \begin_layout Subsection
13331 \begin_inset Index idx
13334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13343 \begin_layout Standard
13344 There are two types of fonts:
13347 \begin_layout Description
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13353 \begin_inset Index idx
13356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13362 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13367 characters) in the font.
13368 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13369 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13370 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13371 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13372 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13373 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13374 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13375 \begin_inset Newline newline
13378 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13379 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13380 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13381 sizes than at small ones.
13382 \begin_inset Newline newline
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13404 \begin_layout Description
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13410 \begin_inset Index idx
13413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13419 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13420 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13421 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13422 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13423 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13424 image manipulation program.
13425 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13426 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13427 \begin_inset space ~
13430 pixels high up to 34
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13434 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13435 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13436 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13438 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13439 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13440 \begin_inset Newline newline
13443 Bitmap fonts are named
13446 \begin_inset space ~
13451 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13455 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13456 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13457 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13458 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13459 use scalable fonts.
13462 \begin_layout Standard
13463 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13466 \begin_layout Standard
13467 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13469 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13471 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13474 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13475 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13476 font, to emphasize text you use an
13477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13485 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13487 In \SpecialChar LyX
13488 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13492 \begin_layout Subsection
13495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13497 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13504 \begin_layout Standard
13505 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13506 used its own fonts.
13507 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13508 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13511 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13512 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13513 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13514 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13515 to a word processor.
13516 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13517 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 files are very portable across
13519 different machines.
13520 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13521 has increased a lot
13522 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13525 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13527 \begin_inset space ~
13531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13533 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13538 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13539 code in the document
13540 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13543 \begin_layout Standard
13544 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 engines that are also able directly
13546 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13548 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13550 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13552 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13553 that is installed on your system.
13554 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13566 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13567 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13575 \begin_layout Subsection
13576 Document Font and Font size
13577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13579 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13584 \begin_inset Index idx
13587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 \begin_inset Index idx
13597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13606 \begin_layout Standard
13607 You can set the document fonts in the
13609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13613 \begin_inset Index idx
13616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13617 Document ! Settings
13627 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13628 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13631 \begin_inset space ~
13640 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13645 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13648 \begin_layout Standard
13653 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13654 This requires that you use
13666 as the output format, i.
13667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13671 \begin_inset space \space{}
13674 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13675 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13676 installed (see section
13677 \begin_inset space ~
13681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13683 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13688 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13690 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13691 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13693 \begin_inset space ~
13696 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13697 cannot determine the family.
13698 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13699 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13702 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13705 \begin_layout Standard
13706 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13707 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13712 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13718 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13720 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13722 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13725 font encoding, this is
13726 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13727 , depending on the document language,
13730 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13731 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13739 \begin_inset space ~
13745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13756 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13764 \begin_inset space ~
13770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13778 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13799 European Computer Modern
13802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13810 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13818 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13819 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13824 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13832 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13838 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13839 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13842 \begin_layout Itemize
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13851 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13864 \begin_inset space ~
13869 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13870 community in order to replace
13874 as the default font.
13875 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13876 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13879 \begin_inset space ~
13892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13893 One difference is improved kerning.
13901 \begin_layout Itemize
13902 If you do not like the look of
13910 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13931 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13932 \begin_inset space ~
13935 serif and typewriter fonts,
13939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13940 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13947 \begin_inset space ~
13956 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13961 \begin_inset space \space{}
13969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13973 \begin_inset space \space{}
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13997 but you can also select your own.
13998 \begin_inset Newline newline
14001 The differences between roman,
14004 \begin_inset space ~
14013 fonts are explained in section
14014 \begin_inset space ~
14018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14020 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14025 \begin_inset Newline newline
14031 \begin_inset space ~
14036 was originally designed for newspapers.
14037 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14038 into the small newspaper columns.
14042 \begin_inset space ~
14047 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14050 \begin_layout Standard
14051 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14064 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14069 depends on the class you are using.
14070 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14073 \begin_layout Standard
14074 Note that the font size is the
14079 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14080 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14081 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14082 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14085 \begin_inset space ~
14091 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14092 \begin_inset space ~
14096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14098 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14105 \begin_layout Standard
14109 \begin_inset space ~
14114 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14116 \begin_inset space ~
14119 serif or typewriter.
14124 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14134 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14137 \begin_layout Standard
14142 LaTeX font encoding
14144 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14145 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14151 \begin_inset Index idx
14154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14162 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14164 \begin_inset space ~
14168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14170 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14177 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14178 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14179 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14183 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14192 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14194 Use Old Style Figures
14198 Use True Small Caps
14201 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14204 Use Old Style Figures
14206 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14208 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14216 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14220 Use True Small Caps
14222 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14223 of scaled capitals.
14224 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14225 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14226 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14230 \begin_layout Standard
14232 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14233 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14234 provided by the font package (or the
14238 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14243 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14249 \begin_layout Standard
14254 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14255 a font to display the script characters.
14259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14260 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14266 \begin_inset Index idx
14269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 So this has no effect for the document language
14292 \begin_layout Standard
14295 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14297 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14298 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14304 \begin_inset Index idx
14307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14309 packages ! microtype
14318 \begin_layout Standard
14321 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14323 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14328 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14329 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14335 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14336 \begin_inset space ~
14340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14342 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14352 \begin_layout Standard
14353 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14365 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14370 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14371 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14373 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14375 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14378 dialog, see section
14379 \begin_inset space ~
14383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14385 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14397 \begin_layout Subsection
14401 \begin_layout Standard
14402 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14403 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14405 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14406 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14407 choose a math font in the dialog
14409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14413 \begin_inset Index idx
14416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14417 Document ! Settings
14423 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14424 automatically selects a math font.
14425 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14426 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset space ~
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14447 document font is available.
14450 \begin_layout Standard
14451 Note that the math font will not be used for
14455 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14461 or by the insertion of the command
14468 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14469 \begin_inset space ~
14473 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14474 while the math characters do not.
14476 \begin_inset space ~
14479 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14482 \begin_inset space ~
14490 \begin_inset space ~
14495 in the document font settings.
14498 \begin_layout Standard
14499 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14500 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14501 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14502 font (in most cases
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14509 \begin_inset space ~
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14518 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14519 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14527 \begin_inset space ~
14533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14539 \begin_layout Subsection
14541 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14551 name "subsec:charstyles"
14558 \begin_inset Index idx
14561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14568 \begin_inset Index idx
14571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14580 \begin_layout Standard
14581 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14582 automatically changes the
14583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14586 style for certain paragraph environments.
14588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14589 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14591 This is where we meet the concept of
14597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14603 \begin_layout Standard
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14610 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14612 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14634 e., available with all document classes.
14635 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14639 for specific purposes.
14640 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14643 \begin_layout Standard
14645 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14646 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14656 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14660 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 — you customized the
14678 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14679 among them, encourage the use of
14691 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14698 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14703 Rather than fiddling with
14707 , they encourage the use of
14711 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14716 \begin_inset Quotes els
14720 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14723 ), not their form (
14724 \begin_inset Quotes els
14728 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14732 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14733 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14734 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14735 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14736 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14737 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14743 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14747 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14748 With a semantic markup (such as
14752 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14757 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14759 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14760 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14765 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14766 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14767 by \SpecialChar LyX
14773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14776 Builtin Text Styles
14777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14779 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14786 \begin_layout Standard
14788 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14789 The two builtin text styles can be
14790 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14799 both of these styles
14802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14806 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
14808 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14822 \begin_layout Standard
14827 style, do one of the following:
14830 \begin_layout Itemize
14831 click on the toolbar button
14840 \begin_layout Itemize
14841 use the key binding
14848 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14852 \begin_layout Itemize
14854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14858 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
14860 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
14862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14870 arg "dialog-show character"
14874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14878 arg "dialog-show character"
14882 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
14883 as described in section
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14890 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14895 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14907 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
14909 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
14913 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
14917 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
14919 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
14923 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
14931 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14934 \begin_layout Standard
14935 One typically uses the
14939 style for proper names.
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14948 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14958 \begin_layout Standard
14960 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14965 is producing text in
14969 , but the definition can be changed.
14974 \begin_layout Standard
14976 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14986 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14993 \begin_layout Itemize
14994 clicking on the toolbar button
15003 \begin_layout Itemize
15004 using the keybindings
15011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15015 \begin_layout Itemize
15017 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15021 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
15023 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
15025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15033 arg "dialog-show character"
15037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15041 arg "dialog-show character"
15045 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
15046 as described in section
15047 \begin_inset space ~
15051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15053 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15058 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15073 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15075 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15077 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15080 packages use a different font
15081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15082 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15088 \begin_layout Standard
15089 We've been using the
15093 style all over the place in this document.
15094 Here's one more example:
15097 \begin_layout Quotation
15101 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15103 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15110 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15111 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15112 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15113 the common tendency to overuse
15114 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15121 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15127 \begin_layout Standard
15129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15130 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15131 only as font changes and integrated in the
15139 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15142 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15160 \begin_inset space ~
15163 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15175 arg "dialog-show character"
15181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15183 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15189 arg "dialog-show character"
15193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15203 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15210 \begin_layout Standard
15212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15213 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15215 \begin_inset space ~
15219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15221 reference "subsec:Modules"
15228 ), or local layout settings (see section
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15235 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15240 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15244 markup for specific functions.
15245 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15250 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15260 \begin_inset Quotes els
15264 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15270 \begin_layout Standard
15272 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15273 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15275 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15277 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
15279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15288 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15293 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15294 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15295 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15300 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15301 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15314 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15315 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15316 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15317 \begin_inset Flex Code
15320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15331 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15345 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15359 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15360 on screen their formal appearance.
15365 \begin_layout Subsection
15367 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15387 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15395 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15400 \begin_inset Index idx
15403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15412 \begin_layout Standard
15413 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15417 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15419 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15426 the properties of text passages
15427 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15431 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15432 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15433 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15434 from ordinary dialog.
15435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15439 \begin_layout Standard
15441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15442 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15443 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15444 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15445 the properties of the respective text passages.
15450 comes in as a last resort.
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 Before we document how to
15457 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15458 use custom character style
15459 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15460 tweak the text properties
15462 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15463 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15465 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15469 \begin_inset Newline newline
15472 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15473 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15476 \begin_layout Standard
15478 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15479 use custom character styles
15480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15481 tweak text properties
15484 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15489 \begin_inset space ~
15492 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15500 arg "dialog-show character"
15503 dialog or press the toolbar button
15506 arg "dialog-show character"
15511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15514 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15517 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15520 property that you can choose.
15521 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15524 \begin_inset space ~
15529 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15537 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15542 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15543 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15544 environments all at once.
15547 \begin_layout Standard
15549 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15551 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
15555 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
15557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15561 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
15563 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
15568 , and their options (in addition to
15571 \begin_inset space ~
15577 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15589 \begin_layout Labeling
15590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15604 The possible options are:
15608 \begin_layout Labeling
15609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15614 This is the Roman font family.
15615 Normally a serif font.
15616 It's also the default family.
15626 \begin_layout Labeling
15627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15631 \begin_inset space ~
15638 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15650 \begin_layout Labeling
15651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15658 This is the Typewriter font family.
15664 arg "font-typewriter"
15670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15674 \begin_layout Standard
15676 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15677 The general differences of these families are:
15680 \begin_layout Itemize
15682 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15687 fonts use characters with serifs.
15688 These are the small
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15697 The following example shows the difference:
15698 \begin_inset Newline newline
15702 \begin_inset Newline newline
15707 text without serifs
15710 \begin_inset Newline newline
15713 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15714 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15721 \begin_layout Itemize
15723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15728 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15729 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15730 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15733 \begin_layout Itemize
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15748 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15766 \begin_inset Newline newline
15770 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15788 \begin_inset Note Note
15791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15793 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15794 For more on phantoms see section
15795 \begin_inset space ~
15799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15801 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15811 \begin_inset Newline newline
15820 \begin_layout Labeling
15821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15826 This corresponds to the print weight.
15831 \begin_layout Labeling
15832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15837 This is the Medium font series.
15838 It's also the default series.
15841 \begin_layout Labeling
15842 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15849 This is the Bold font series.
15862 \begin_layout Labeling
15863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15868 As the name implies.
15873 \begin_layout Labeling
15874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15879 This is the Upright font shape.
15880 It's also the default shape.
15883 \begin_layout Labeling
15884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15904 s the Italic font shape
15910 \begin_layout Labeling
15911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15918 This is the Slanted font shape
15920 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15921 , this is different from italic).
15924 \begin_layout Labeling
15925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15936 This is the Small caps font shape
15943 \begin_layout Labeling
15944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15946 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15951 Alters the text color.
15952 Note that not all DVI
15953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15955 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15956 viewers are able to display colors.
15960 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15962 \begin_inset space ~
15966 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15969 , which means that the document default color set in
15971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15972 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15978 \begin_inset space ~
15984 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15986 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15990 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16068 \begin_inset Index idx
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16078 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16084 \begin_layout Labeling
16085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16087 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16092 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16093 the language of the document.
16094 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16095 workarea in blue to
16096 indicate the change
16097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16098 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16100 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16102 \begin_inset Newline newline
16105 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16107 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16108 When using the spell checking (see section
16109 \begin_inset space ~
16113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16115 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16119 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16120 \begin_inset Newline newline
16123 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16125 Exclude from Spellchecking
16128 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16133 \begin_layout Labeling
16134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16139 Alters the size of the font.
16141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16150 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16151 document font size.
16152 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16153 the details, but a general description of what
16159 \begin_layout Labeling
16160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16181 arg "font-size tiny"
16187 \begin_layout Labeling
16188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16209 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16215 \begin_layout Labeling
16216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16237 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16243 \begin_layout Labeling
16244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16265 arg "font-size small"
16271 \begin_layout Labeling
16272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 It's also the default size.
16290 arg "font-size normal"
16296 \begin_layout Labeling
16297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16318 arg "font-size large"
16324 \begin_layout Labeling
16325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16346 arg "font-size larger"
16352 \begin_layout Labeling
16353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16374 arg "font-size largest"
16380 \begin_layout Labeling
16381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 arg "font-size huge"
16408 \begin_layout Labeling
16409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16430 arg "font-size giant"
16436 \begin_layout Labeling
16437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16442 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 arg "font-size increase"
16468 \begin_layout Labeling
16469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16474 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 arg "font-size decrease"
16500 \begin_layout Standard
16505 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16506 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16508 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16509 — use those instead.
16510 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16511 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
16516 \begin_layout Standard
16518 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
16519 Another combo box allows to tweak
16526 \begin_layout Labeling
16527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16529 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16534 Alters the text color.
16535 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16540 , which means that the document default color set in
16542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16549 \begin_inset space ~
16554 is used, you can select
16631 \begin_inset Index idx
16634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16636 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16649 \begin_layout Labeling
16650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16652 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16656 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16662 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16663 change a few other things at the character level
16664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16665 have text passages being underlined
16669 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16670 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16671 days, when you could not change fonts.
16672 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16673 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16674 because some people
16678 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16685 \begin_layout Labeling
16686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16695 This is text with emphasize on
16698 This might seem like the same as
16702 , but it is actually a bit different.
16708 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16710 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16715 \begin_layout Labeling
16716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16723 Don't use underlining.
16728 \begin_layout Labeling
16729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16743 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16745 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16754 arg "font-underline"
16760 \begin_inset Newline newline
16764 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16767 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16768 when you could not change fonts.
16769 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16770 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16771 because some people
16775 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16780 \begin_layout Labeling
16781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16785 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16796 This is text with Double under
16797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16799 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16808 arg "font-underunderline"
16812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16814 \begin_inset Newline newline
16817 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16818 about double underbar
16823 \begin_layout Labeling
16824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16839 This is text with Wavy under
16840 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16842 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16851 arg "font-underwave"
16855 \begin_inset Newline newline
16858 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16859 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16865 \begin_layout Labeling
16866 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16873 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16879 \begin_layout Labeling
16880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16887 Don't use strikethrough.
16890 \begin_layout Labeling
16891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16897 \begin_inset space ~
16901 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16909 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16912 Single strikethrough
16920 arg "font-strikeout"
16924 \begin_inset Newline newline
16927 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16928 changed in the meantime.
16931 \begin_layout Labeling
16932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16938 \begin_inset space ~
16942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16944 \begin_inset space ~
16948 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16956 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16958 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16964 \begin_inset Newline newline
16967 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16971 \begin_layout Standard
16973 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
16974 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
16977 \begin_layout Labeling
16978 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16980 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
16985 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16986 the language of the document.
16987 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16988 workarea in blue to
16989 indicate the change.
16990 \begin_inset Newline newline
16993 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16995 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16996 When using the spell checking (see section
16997 \begin_inset space ~
17001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17003 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17007 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17008 \begin_inset Newline newline
17011 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17013 Exclude from Spellchecking
17016 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17019 \begin_layout Standard
17021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17022 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17023 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17024 \begin_inset space ~
17028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17030 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17035 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
17039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17045 \begin_layout Itemize
17047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17054 This is text with emphasize on
17059 \begin_layout Itemize
17063 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17070 This is text with Noun on.
17072 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17079 , this is a logical attribute.
17080 Normally it's equivalent to
17083 \begin_inset space ~
17093 \begin_layout Standard
17094 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17097 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17102 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17103 chosen a new character style
17104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17105 applied a text property
17108 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17111 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17113 \begin_inset space ~
17116 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17124 arg "dialog-show character"
17130 arg "dialog-show character"
17133 ) dialog, the settings are
17134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17138 You can activate the
17139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17142 last applied properties
17144 by using the toolbar button
17147 arg "textstyle-apply"
17151 The button lets you apply
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17153 your custom character style
17154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17157 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17159 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17160 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17161 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17162 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17167 \begin_layout Standard
17168 To completely reset the
17169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17171 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17172 text properties of a selection
17174 to the default, use
17175 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17177 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17187 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17192 from the menu of the toolbar button
17195 arg "textstyle-apply"
17202 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17203 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17204 you just set the shape to
17205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17239 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17240 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17260 \begin_layout Itemize
17262 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17293 \begin_inset Newline newline
17297 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17311 \begin_inset Note Note
17314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17315 For more on phantoms see section
17316 \begin_inset space ~
17320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17322 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17332 \begin_inset Newline newline
17338 \begin_layout Itemize
17340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17345 fonts use characters with serifs.
17346 These are the small
17347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17354 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17355 The following example shows the difference:
17356 \begin_inset Newline newline
17360 \begin_inset Newline newline
17365 text without serifs
17368 \begin_inset Newline newline
17371 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17372 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17379 \begin_layout Itemize
17381 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17386 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17387 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17388 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17393 \begin_layout Standard
17395 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17403 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17404 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17407 \begin_inset space ~
17412 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17413 the property to be removed.
17414 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17415 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17416 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17434 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17435 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17452 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17463 If you, for example, set
17464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 \begin_inset space ~
17487 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17496 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17501 \begin_layout Standard
17503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17506 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17507 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17510 \begin_layout Section
17511 Printing and Previewing
17514 \begin_layout Subsection
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17520 using \SpecialChar LyX
17521 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17522 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17523 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17524 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17526 Additional Features
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17533 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17536 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17537 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17538 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17541 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17542 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17543 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17544 to turn your writing into printable output.
17545 This happens in two stages:
17548 \begin_layout Enumerate
17549 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17550 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17552 a file with the extension,
17553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17567 \begin_layout Enumerate
17568 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17569 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17570 to use the commands in the
17574 file to produce printable output.
17577 \begin_layout Subsection
17578 Output file formats
17579 \begin_inset Index idx
17582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17591 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17600 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17602 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17606 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17610 \begin_inset Index idx
17613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17617 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17628 \begin_layout Standard
17629 This file type has the extension
17630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 It contains your document as plain text
17643 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17645 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17646 following the rules of the
17647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17660 You can export your document to
17661 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17663 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17668 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17669 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17671 \begin_inset space ~
17677 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17678 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17679 bibliography (section
17680 \begin_inset space ~
17684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17686 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17691 If your document includes such material, use
17693 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17694 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17696 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset space ~
17704 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17722 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17723 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17724 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17726 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17735 \begin_inset Index idx
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17739 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17748 \begin_layout Standard
17749 This file type has the extension
17750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17761 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17764 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17765 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 -Errors or to process it manually
17767 with console commands.
17768 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17769 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17770 's temporary directory whenever you
17771 view or export your document.
17774 \begin_layout Standard
17775 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17776 -file using the menu
17778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17779 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17783 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17784 export variants are explained in section
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17791 reference "subsec:Export"
17798 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17800 \begin_inset Index idx
17803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17812 \begin_layout Standard
17813 This file type has the extension
17814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17834 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17835 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17836 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17840 \begin_layout Standard
17841 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17842 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17843 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17844 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17845 when you view the DVI.
17846 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17849 \begin_layout Standard
17850 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17852 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17853 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17859 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17867 The latter option uses the program
17869 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17875 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17878 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17879 font access (see section
17880 \begin_inset space ~
17884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17886 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17891 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17892 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17899 \begin_inset Index idx
17902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17903 File formats ! PostScript
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17912 This file type has the extension
17913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17925 PostScript was developed by the company
17929 as a printer language.
17930 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17932 PostScript can be seen as a
17933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17936 programming language
17937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17940 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17952 \begin_inset Index idx
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17957 packages ! pstricks
17967 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17970 \begin_layout Standard
17971 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17975 Encapsulated PostScript
17976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17979 (EPS, file extension
17980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17992 As \SpecialChar LyX
17993 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17994 convert them in the background to EPS.
17995 If, for example, you have 50
17996 \begin_inset space ~
17999 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18001 \begin_inset space ~
18004 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18005 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18007 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18008 EPS to avoid this problem.
18011 \begin_layout Standard
18012 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18014 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18015 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18023 \begin_inset Index idx
18026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18033 \begin_inset Index idx
18036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18045 \begin_layout Standard
18046 This file type has the extension
18047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18063 Portable Document Format
18064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18071 was derived from PostScript.
18072 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18081 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18082 looks exactly the same.
18085 \begin_layout Standard
18086 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18090 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18094 (JPG, file extension
18095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18122 Portable Network Graphics
18123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18126 (PNG, file extension
18127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18139 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18140 converts them in the
18141 background to one of these formats.
18142 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18143 will slow down your workflow.
18144 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18150 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18156 \begin_layout Description
18158 \begin_inset space ~
18161 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18165 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18168 \begin_layout Description
18170 \begin_inset space ~
18177 ) This uses the program
18179 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18182 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18185 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18188 is a new engine, derived from
18192 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18193 access (see section
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18200 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18205 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18206 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18211 \begin_layout Description
18213 \begin_inset space ~
18220 ) This uses the program
18225 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18231 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18232 font access (see section
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18239 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18244 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18245 vertically written Japanese.
18248 \begin_layout Description
18250 \begin_inset space ~
18253 (cropped) This is the same as
18256 \begin_inset space ~
18261 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18262 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18263 to generate good-looking
18264 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18267 \begin_layout Description
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18272 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18276 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18280 \begin_layout Description
18282 \begin_inset space ~
18285 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18289 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18290 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18294 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18295 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18298 \begin_layout Standard
18302 \begin_inset space ~
18311 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18312 works without problems.
18313 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18314 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18331 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18341 \begin_inset Index idx
18344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 FileFormats ! XHTML
18351 \begin_inset Index idx
18354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 \begin_layout Standard
18364 This file type has the extension
18365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18377 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18378 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18379 When \SpecialChar LyX
18380 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18381 suitable for the purpose.
18382 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18385 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18388 between different formats, which are described in section
18390 Math Output in XHTML
18395 \begin_inset space ~
18403 \begin_layout Standard
18404 XHTML output remains
18405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18413 features are supported yet.
18417 and the World Wide Web
18421 Additional Features
18423 manual, for more information.
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18429 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18430 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18436 \begin_layout Subsection
18438 \begin_inset Index idx
18441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18450 \begin_layout Standard
18451 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18452 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18461 or use the toolbar button
18468 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18469 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18470 \begin_inset space ~
18474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18476 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18480 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18482 \begin_inset space ~
18486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18488 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18493 Further output formats can be selected via
18495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18496 View (Other Formats)
18498 or the toolbar button
18507 \begin_layout Standard
18508 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18509 viewer window using the menu
18511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 Update (Other Formats)
18522 \begin_layout Standard
18523 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18526 To have a real output, export your document.
18529 \begin_layout Section
18530 A few Words about Typography
18531 \begin_inset Index idx
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 \begin_layout Subsection
18544 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18545 \begin_inset Index idx
18548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 \begin_inset Index idx
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_layout Standard
18568 In \SpecialChar LyX
18570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18581 symbol comes in four variants: the
18598 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18604 \begin_layout Standard
18605 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18615 height_special "totalheight"
18620 backgroundcolor "none"
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18624 \begin_inset Tabular
18625 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18626 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18627 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18628 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18630 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18631 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18659 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18660 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18699 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18722 system key combination
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18739 and the em dash with
18742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18755 is the Mac label for the right
18765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18778 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 system key combination or
18802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18868 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18874 \begin_layout Standard
18875 Dashes can also be inserted with
18877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18879 \begin_inset space ~
18882 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18890 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18891 and 2014 for the en dash).
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18895 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18896 mode and has a length of its own.
18897 Here are some examples:
18900 \begin_layout Enumerate
18901 line- and page-breaks
18902 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18912 \begin_layout Enumerate
18914 \begin_inset space ~
18918 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18928 \begin_layout Enumerate
18929 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18940 \begin_layout Enumerate
18941 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18945 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18959 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18960 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18968 \begin_layout Subsection
18969 Dashes and Line Breaks
18970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18972 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18979 \begin_layout Standard
18980 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18981 case and locale, e.
18982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18988 \begin_layout Itemize
18989 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18990 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18993 \begin_layout Itemize
18994 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18998 \begin_layout Itemize
18999 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19000 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19003 \begin_layout Standard
19004 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19005 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19016 allows line breaks after hyphens
19017 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19019 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19022 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19025 \begin_layout Enumerate
19026 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19027 \begin_inset space ~
19030 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19032 The Elements of Typographic Style
19035 \begin_inset space ~
19038 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
19041 \begin_layout Enumerate
19042 Unwanted line breaks
19047 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19049 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19052 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19059 Prevent Hyphenation
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19080 in \SpecialChar TeX
19082 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19083 , a protected space does not suffice
19087 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19094 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19095 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19096 in the document language.
19097 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19111 \begin_layout Itemize
19113 \begin_inset space ~
19117 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19127 height_special "totalheight"
19132 backgroundcolor "none"
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_layout Itemize
19146 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19156 height_special "totalheight"
19161 backgroundcolor "none"
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19166 \begin_inset space ~
19174 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19175 \begin_inset space ~
19178 – sont très utiles.
19181 \begin_layout Itemize
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19199 \begin_layout Standard
19200 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19201 \begin_inset space ~
19204 – in contrast to an overfull line
19205 \begin_inset space ~
19208 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19212 \begin_layout Standard
19213 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19217 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19218 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19219 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19224 \begin_layout Enumerate
19225 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19226 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
19227 or \SpecialChar TeX
19233 \begin_layout Itemize
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19238 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19242 – sont très utiles.
19246 \begin_layout Enumerate
19247 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19248 \begin_inset Newline newline
19253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19256 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19258 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19260 \begin_inset space ~
19266 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19268 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19281 \begin_layout Itemize
19282 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19283 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19284 should be followed by
19285 a line break opportunity.
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19289 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19290 \begin_inset space ~
19294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19296 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19307 \begin_layout Enumerate
19308 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19309 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19310 or en dashes (see section
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19317 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19328 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19331 \begin_layout Standard
19332 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19337 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19338 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19347 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19348 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19356 \begin_layout Standard
19357 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19359 \begin_inset space ~
19362 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19364 prevents ligation to dashes.
19366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19373 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19378 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19379 after the input (unless the current text font is
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19388 The behavior was changed since
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19404 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19405 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19406 as non-breakable dashes.
19407 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19415 \begin_layout Standard
19418 \begin_inset space ~
19426 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19428 \begin_inset space ~
19431 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19435 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19436 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19437 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19439 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19443 If you used both literal and
19444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19451 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19456 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19457 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19460 \begin_layout Subsection
19462 \begin_inset Index idx
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19474 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19481 \begin_layout Standard
19482 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19483 but automatically in the output.
19484 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19490 \begin_inset Index idx
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 following the rules of the document language.
19502 does not hyphenate text in the
19506 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19509 \begin_layout Standard
19511 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19515 font and with unusual constructs, like
19516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19524 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19525 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19526 This is done with the menu
19528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19529 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19531 \begin_inset space ~
19537 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19539 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19543 \begin_layout Standard
19544 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19545 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19556 would then see the hyphen
19557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19564 as a line break possibility.
19565 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19566 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19570 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19573 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19575 Prevent Hyphenation
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19588 \begin_layout Subsection
19590 \begin_inset Index idx
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19603 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19606 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19613 \begin_layout Standard
19614 When \SpecialChar LyX
19615 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19616 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19618 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19624 appropriate amount of space.
19625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19628 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19630 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19631 gets after another word.
19634 \begin_layout Standard
19635 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19636 not work in all cases.
19638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19649 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19650 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19653 \begin_layout Standard
19654 Here are some examples of
19658 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19661 \begin_layout Itemize
19666 \begin_layout Itemize
19671 \begin_layout Standard
19672 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19675 \begin_layout Itemize
19677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19681 this is too much space!
19684 \begin_layout Itemize
19689 \begin_layout Standard
19690 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19693 \begin_layout Standard
19694 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19697 \begin_layout Enumerate
19701 \begin_inset space ~
19706 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19707 \begin_inset space ~
19711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19713 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19718 \begin_inset Index idx
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 Spaces ! inter-word
19730 \begin_layout Enumerate
19734 \begin_inset space ~
19739 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19740 \begin_inset space ~
19744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19746 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19751 \begin_inset Index idx
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19763 \begin_layout Enumerate
19767 \begin_inset space ~
19771 \begin_inset space ~
19775 \begin_inset space ~
19782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19789 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19790 This function is also bound to
19793 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19799 \begin_layout Standard
19800 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19803 \begin_layout Itemize
19805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19809 \begin_inset space \space{}
19812 this is too much space!
19815 \begin_layout Itemize
19816 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19820 \begin_layout Standard
19821 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19822 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19824 will take care of this.
19827 \begin_layout Standard
19828 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19832 \begin_inset space ~
19838 feature described in the section
19840 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19845 Additional Features
19850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19852 \begin_inset Index idx
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 Typography ! Quotation marks
19862 \begin_inset Index idx
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 Quotation marks | see
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 \begin_layout Standard
19898 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19899 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19900 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19910 The keyboard character,
19914 , generates this automatically.
19917 \begin_layout Standard
19918 You can specify what character the
19922 key produces by using the submenu
19928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19932 \begin_inset Index idx
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 Document ! Settings
19941 dialog and switching the
19945 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19946 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19948 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19950 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19954 \begin_inset space ~
19960 \begin_layout Labeling
19961 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19973 \begin_inset space ~
19977 \begin_inset space ~
19981 \begin_inset Quotes els
19985 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19999 \begin_inset Quotes els
20003 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20006 quotation marks (as common, e.
20007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20013 \begin_layout Labeling
20014 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20017 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20021 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20025 \begin_inset space ~
20029 \begin_inset space ~
20033 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20037 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20043 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20051 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20055 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20058 quotation marks (as common, e.
20059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20065 \begin_layout Labeling
20066 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20069 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20073 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20081 \begin_inset space ~
20085 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20089 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20095 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20099 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20103 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20107 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20110 quotation marks (as common, e.
20111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20117 \begin_layout Labeling
20118 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20121 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20125 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset space ~
20137 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20141 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20147 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20151 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20155 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20159 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20162 quotation marks (as common, e.
20163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20169 \begin_layout Labeling
20170 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20173 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20177 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20181 \begin_inset space ~
20185 \begin_inset space ~
20189 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20193 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20199 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20203 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20207 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20211 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20214 quotation marks (as common, e.
20215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20218 g., in Switzerland)
20221 \begin_layout Labeling
20222 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20225 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20229 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20233 \begin_inset space ~
20237 \begin_inset space ~
20241 \begin_inset Quotes als
20245 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20251 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20255 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20259 \begin_inset Quotes als
20263 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20266 quotation marks (as common, e.
20267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20273 \begin_layout Labeling
20274 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20277 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20281 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20285 \begin_inset space ~
20289 \begin_inset space ~
20293 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20297 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20303 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20307 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20311 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20315 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20318 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20321 \begin_layout Labeling
20322 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20325 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20329 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20333 \begin_inset space ~
20337 \begin_inset space ~
20341 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20345 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20351 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20355 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20359 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20363 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20366 quotation marks (as common, e.
20367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20370 g., in Great Britain)
20373 \begin_layout Labeling
20374 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20377 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20381 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20385 \begin_inset space ~
20389 \begin_inset space ~
20393 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20397 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20403 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20407 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20411 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20415 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20418 quotation marks (as common, e.
20419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20425 \begin_layout Labeling
20426 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20429 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20433 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20441 \begin_inset space ~
20445 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20449 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20455 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20459 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20463 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20467 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20470 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20476 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20477 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20478 the inner marks differ).
20486 \begin_layout Labeling
20487 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20490 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20494 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20498 \begin_inset space ~
20502 \begin_inset space ~
20506 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20510 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20516 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20520 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20524 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20528 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20531 quotation marks (as common, e.
20532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20538 \begin_layout Labeling
20539 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20542 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20546 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20550 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_inset space ~
20558 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20562 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20568 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20572 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20576 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20580 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20583 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20584 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20588 \begin_layout Labeling
20589 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20591 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20594 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20598 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20602 \begin_inset space ~
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20610 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20614 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20622 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20630 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20638 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20646 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20651 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20656 \begin_layout Labeling
20657 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20658 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20666 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20672 \begin_inset space ~
20676 \begin_inset space ~
20682 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20690 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20694 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20698 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20702 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20706 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20709 quotation marks (as common, e.
20710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20722 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20728 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20729 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20737 \begin_layout Labeling
20738 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20739 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20747 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20753 \begin_inset space ~
20757 \begin_inset space ~
20763 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20771 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20775 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20779 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20783 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20787 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20790 quotation marks (as common, e.
20791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20794 g., in North Korea and China)
20795 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20797 \begin_inset script superscript
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20804 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20819 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20826 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20836 \begin_layout Standard
20837 Inner quotation marks
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20843 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20844 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20852 does not necessarily mean
20853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20861 This is why we call them
20862 \begin_inset Quotes els
20866 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20882 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20884 \begin_inset Quotes els
20888 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20891 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20894 arg "quote-insert inner"
20899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20906 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20907 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20908 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20909 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20910 If you check the setting
20912 Use dynamic quotation marks
20916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20917 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20920 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20921 they appear in a special color).
20922 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20923 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20928 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20931 \begin_layout Standard
20932 Individual quotation marks (i.
20933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20936 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20937 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20941 \begin_layout Subsection
20943 \begin_inset Index idx
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 Typography ! Ligatures
20953 \begin_inset Index idx
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20987 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20994 \begin_layout Standard
20995 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20996 print them as single characters.
20997 These groups are known as
21002 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21003 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21005 Here are the standard ligatures:
21008 \begin_layout Itemize
21012 \begin_layout Itemize
21016 \begin_layout Itemize
21020 \begin_layout Itemize
21024 \begin_layout Itemize
21028 \begin_layout Standard
21029 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21032 \begin_layout Standard
21033 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21034 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21042 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21058 To break a ligature, use
21060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21061 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21063 \begin_inset space ~
21070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21081 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21098 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21106 \begin_layout Subsection
21108 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21110 \begin_inset Index idx
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 \begin_layout Standard
21126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21127 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21131 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21134 \begin_layout Description
21136 The name of the game.
21139 \begin_layout Description
21141 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21145 \begin_layout Description
21147 The \SpecialChar TeX
21148 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21152 \begin_layout Description
21153 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21154 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21158 \begin_layout Standard
21159 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21165 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21173 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21174 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21175 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21176 converges to the number
21177 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21180 : The actual version is
21181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21189 , the previous one was
21190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21201 \begin_layout Subsection
21203 \begin_inset Index idx
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 \begin_layout Standard
21216 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21217 space between two words.
21218 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21228 for units use the menu
21230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21231 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21233 \begin_inset space ~
21241 arg "space-insert thin"
21247 \begin_layout Standard
21248 Here is an example to show the differences:
21251 \begin_layout Standard
21252 \begin_inset Tabular
21253 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21254 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21255 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21256 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 \begin_inset space ~
21267 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 space between number and unit
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21295 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 half space between number and unit
21320 \begin_layout Subsection
21322 \begin_inset Index idx
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21335 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21337 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21338 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21339 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21340 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21341 These bits of text became known as
21352 \begin_layout Standard
21353 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21354 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21355 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21356 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21357 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21358 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21359 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21360 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21361 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21362 \begin_inset Newline newline
21370 \begin_inset Newline newline
21378 \begin_inset Newline newline
21381 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21382 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21383 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21385 \begin_inset space ~
21389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21391 key "latexcompanion"
21397 \begin_inset space ~
21401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21408 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21409 's page break mechanism.
21412 \begin_layout Chapter
21413 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21416 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21423 \begin_layout Standard
21424 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21427 \begin_inset space ~
21433 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21436 \begin_layout Section
21438 \begin_inset Index idx
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21457 \begin_layout Standard
21459 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21462 \begin_layout Description
21465 \begin_inset space ~
21468 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21469 \begin_inset Newline newline
21473 \begin_inset Note Note
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21485 \begin_layout Description
21486 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21487 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21488 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21494 \begin_inset space ~
21500 \begin_inset Newline newline
21504 \begin_inset Note Comment
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21517 \begin_layout Description
21519 \begin_inset space ~
21522 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21523 set in the document settings under
21525 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21527 \begin_inset space ~
21533 \begin_inset Newline newline
21537 \begin_inset Newline newline
21541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21551 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21556 of a comment that appears in the output.
21562 \begin_inset Newline newline
21566 \begin_inset Newline newline
21569 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21572 \begin_layout Standard
21573 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21585 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21588 \begin_layout Section
21590 \begin_inset Index idx
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21602 name "sec:Footnotes"
21609 \begin_layout Standard
21611 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21617 or the toolbar button
21620 arg "footnote-insert"
21632 \begin_inset Graphics
21633 filename clipart/footnote.png
21642 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21643 's representation of your footnote.
21653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21672 label, the box will
21676 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21677 Clicking on the box label again will close
21690 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21691 and click on the footnote
21706 \begin_layout Standard
21707 Here is an example footnote:
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21724 \begin_layout Standard
21725 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21726 position where the footnote box is placed.
21727 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21728 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21729 according to the document class.
21731 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21732 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21738 ey are described in the
21741 \begin_inset space ~
21749 \begin_layout Section
21751 \begin_inset Index idx
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21763 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21770 \begin_layout Standard
21771 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21773 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21782 or the toolbar button
21785 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21811 appearing within your text.
21812 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21813 's representation of your margin
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21823 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21827 \begin_inset Marginal
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 This is a marginal note.
21840 \begin_layout Standard
21841 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21842 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21843 pages, right on odd pages.
21846 \begin_layout Standard
21847 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21850 \begin_inset space ~
21858 \begin_inset space ~
21866 \begin_layout Section
21867 Graphics and Images
21868 \begin_inset Index idx
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 \begin_inset Index idx
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21890 name "sec:Graphics"
21897 \begin_layout Standard
21898 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21899 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21902 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21911 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21914 \begin_layout Standard
21915 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21920 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21921 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21923 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21924 \begin_inset space ~
21928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21930 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21942 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21943 of the image in the output.
21944 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21948 \begin_inset space ~
21952 \begin_inset space ~
21961 \begin_inset space ~
21965 \begin_inset space ~
21969 \begin_inset space ~
21974 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21975 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21983 \begin_layout Standard
21987 \begin_inset space ~
21991 \begin_inset space ~
21996 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21997 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21999 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22004 \begin_inset space ~
22009 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22010 with the image size is printed.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22015 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22017 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22020 \begin_layout Standard
22022 \begin_inset Graphics
22023 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22031 \begin_layout Standard
22032 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22033 the image into a float, see section
22034 \begin_inset space ~
22038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22040 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22047 \begin_layout Subsection
22049 \begin_inset Index idx
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22061 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22068 \begin_layout Standard
22069 You can insert images in any known file format.
22070 But as we explained in section
22071 \begin_inset space ~
22075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22077 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22081 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22083 therefore uses the program
22087 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22088 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22089 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22090 \begin_inset space ~
22094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22096 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22103 \begin_layout Standard
22104 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22107 \begin_layout Description
22109 \begin_inset space ~
22112 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22113 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22114 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22118 Graphics Interchange Format
22119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22122 (GIF, file extension
22123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22135 \begin_inset Index idx
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22170 Portable Network Graphics
22171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22174 (PNG, file extension
22175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22187 \begin_inset Index idx
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22222 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22226 (JPG, file extension
22227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22251 \begin_inset Index idx
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 \begin_layout Description
22287 \begin_inset space ~
22290 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22292 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22293 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22294 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22295 \begin_inset Newline newline
22298 Scalable image formats can be
22299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22302 Scalable Vector Graphics
22303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22306 (SVG, file extension
22307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22319 \begin_inset Index idx
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22354 Encapsulated PostScript
22355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22358 (EPS, file extension
22359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22371 \begin_inset Index idx
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22406 Portable Document Format
22407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22410 (PDF, file extension
22411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22423 \begin_inset Index idx
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22441 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22442 result will not be scalable.
22443 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22457 \begin_layout Standard
22458 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22465 \begin_layout Subsection
22466 Grouping of Image Settings
22467 \begin_inset Index idx
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 Images ! Settings grouping
22479 \begin_layout Standard
22480 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22482 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22483 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22485 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22486 need to manually change each of them.
22489 \begin_layout Standard
22490 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22493 \begin_inset space ~
22497 \begin_inset space ~
22509 \begin_inset space ~
22513 \begin_inset space ~
22519 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22520 and checking the name of the desired group.
22523 \begin_layout Section
22525 \begin_inset Index idx
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22544 \begin_layout Standard
22545 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22548 arg "tabular-insert"
22553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22557 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22558 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22559 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22562 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22563 from the rest of the table.
22564 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22565 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22567 Here is an example table:
22570 \begin_layout Standard
22572 \begin_inset Tabular
22573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22776 \begin_layout Standard
22778 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22779 This corresponds to the
22780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22787 table style listed in the style selection.
22790 \begin_layout Standard
22792 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22793 Other available styles include:
22796 \begin_layout Itemize
22798 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22807 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22811 \begin_layout Itemize
22813 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22814 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22817 \begin_layout Itemize
22819 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22828 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22829 bold top/bottom lines (see
22839 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
22840 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22848 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22849 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22850 button can be changed in
22852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22857 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22861 \begin_layout Subsection
22865 \begin_layout Standard
22866 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22869 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22873 This brings up the table dialog.
22874 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22875 cursor is placed currently.
22876 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22877 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22878 done on all of your selection.
22881 \begin_layout Standard
22882 In addition to the table dialog, the
22885 \begin_inset space ~
22890 helps you in setting table properties.
22891 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22894 \begin_layout Standard
22898 \begin_inset space ~
22903 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22904 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22905 current cell respectively.
22906 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22908 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22909 of text, see section
22910 \begin_inset space ~
22914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22916 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22923 \begin_layout Standard
22924 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22925 using the check box
22934 This will merge the cells to
22938 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22939 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22940 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22941 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22942 in the last row without the upper border:
22945 \begin_layout Standard
22947 \begin_inset Tabular
22948 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22949 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22950 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22951 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_layout Standard
23085 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23086 -arguments for the table.
23087 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23088 explained in the chapter
23095 \begin_inset space ~
23101 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23102 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23103 but are visible in the output.
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23115 Most DVI-viewers are
23119 able to display rotations.
23127 \begin_layout Standard
23132 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23137 adds lines for all cell borders.
23140 \begin_layout Subsection
23142 \begin_inset Index idx
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 Tables ! Multi-page
23152 \begin_inset Index idx
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 \begin_layout Standard
23165 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23168 \begin_inset space ~
23172 \begin_inset space ~
23180 \begin_inset space ~
23185 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23186 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23189 \begin_layout Description
23194 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23195 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23196 Except for the first page, if
23199 \begin_inset space ~
23207 \begin_layout Description
23211 \begin_inset space ~
23216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23220 \begin_layout Description
23225 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23226 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23227 except for the last page, if
23230 \begin_inset space ~
23238 \begin_layout Description
23242 \begin_inset space ~
23247 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23248 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23251 \begin_layout Description
23252 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23253 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23259 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23262 \begin_inset space ~
23270 \begin_layout Standard
23271 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23272 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23273 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23279 In this context, first means first in this order:
23282 \begin_inset space ~
23294 \begin_inset space ~
23299 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23302 \begin_layout Standard
23304 \begin_inset Tabular
23305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23306 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23307 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23308 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23309 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23310 <row endfirsthead="true">
23311 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23322 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 <row endfirsthead="true">
23342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <row endhead="true">
23375 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23395 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <row endhead="true">
23406 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <row endfoot="true">
23439 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24449 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 <row endlastfoot="true">
25421 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 \begin_layout Subsection
25460 \begin_inset Index idx
25463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25472 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25479 \begin_layout Standard
25480 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25481 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25482 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25483 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25487 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25492 for the column in the table dialog.
25493 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25494 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25498 \begin_layout Standard
25500 \begin_inset Tabular
25501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25502 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25503 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25504 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25650 This is longer now.
25655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25706 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25707 This is longer now.
25712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25738 \begin_layout Standard
25739 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25740 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25746 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25751 Selection with the mouse or with
25755 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25756 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25757 the selection from outside the table.
25760 \begin_layout Section
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25781 \begin_layout Subsection
25785 \begin_layout Standard
25786 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25787 have a fixed location.
25789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25796 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25804 \begin_inset space ~
25809 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25810 too many notes on the current page.
25813 \begin_layout Standard
25814 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25815 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25816 and pages without text.
25817 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25818 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25819 Floats are therefore numbered.
25820 Referencing is described in section
25821 \begin_inset space ~
25825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25827 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 To insert a float, use the menu
25837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25841 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25842 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25844 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25845 \begin_inset Index idx
25848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25855 paragraph within the float.
25856 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25857 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25858 left-clicking on the box label.
25859 A closed float box looks like this:
25860 \begin_inset Graphics
25861 filename clipart/float.png
25866 – a gray button with a red label.
25869 \begin_layout Standard
25870 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25872 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25875 \begin_layout Subsection
25877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25879 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25884 \begin_inset Index idx
25887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25888 Floats ! Figure floats
25896 \begin_layout Standard
25898 \begin_inset space ~
25902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25904 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25908 was created using the menu
25910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25911 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25917 arg "float-insert figure"
25921 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25930 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25934 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25935 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25939 \begin_inset space ~
25947 arg "layout-paragraph"
25953 \begin_layout Standard
25954 \begin_inset Float figure
25961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 \begin_inset Graphics
25964 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25974 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25979 name "fig:A-star-in"
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25998 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26009 ) and refer to it using the menu
26011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26017 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26021 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26022 vague references like
26023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26030 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26031 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26041 For more about cross-references, see section
26042 \begin_inset space ~
26046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26048 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26056 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26057 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26058 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26059 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26060 as described in section
26061 \begin_inset space ~
26065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26067 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26073 \begin_inset space ~
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26079 reference "fig:Two-images"
26083 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26084 You can also set the images one below the other.
26086 \begin_inset space ~
26090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26092 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "fig:Star"
26103 are the subfigures.
26106 \begin_layout Standard
26107 \begin_inset Float figure
26114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26119 \begin_inset Float figure
26126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26132 name "fig:Undefinable"
26144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26145 \begin_inset Graphics
26146 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26162 \begin_inset Float figure
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26170 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26188 \begin_inset Graphics
26189 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26201 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26213 name "fig:Two-images"
26230 \begin_layout Subsection
26232 \begin_inset Index idx
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26236 Floats ! Table floats
26244 \begin_layout Standard
26245 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26248 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26251 or the toolbar button
26254 arg "float-insert table"
26258 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26259 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26260 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26268 reference "tab:Table-float"
26275 \begin_layout Standard
26276 \begin_inset Float table
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26289 name "tab:Table-float"
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26303 \begin_inset Tabular
26304 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26305 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26459 \end{array}\right]$
26467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26501 \begin_layout Subsection
26503 \begin_inset Index idx
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26517 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26518 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26519 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26521 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26529 \begin_inset space ~
26537 \begin_layout Section
26539 \begin_inset Index idx
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 \begin_layout Standard
26553 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26555 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26556 \begin_inset space \space{}
26562 \begin_layout Standard
26563 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26564 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26570 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26571 and its alignment within the page.
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26576 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26586 height_special "totalheight"
26591 backgroundcolor "none"
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 This is a minipage.
26598 The text is set in an italic style.
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26605 another formatting.
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26617 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26621 as described in section
26622 \begin_inset space ~
26626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26628 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26633 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26639 \begin_layout Standard
26640 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26650 height_special "totalheight"
26655 backgroundcolor "none"
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26659 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26660 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26666 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26670 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26680 height_special "totalheight"
26685 backgroundcolor "none"
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26689 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26690 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26698 \begin_layout Standard
26699 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26705 \begin_layout Standard
26706 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26708 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26715 \begin_inset space ~
26723 \begin_layout Chapter
26724 Mathematical Formulas
26725 \begin_inset Index idx
26728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 \begin_inset Index idx
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26769 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26776 \begin_layout Standard
26777 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26782 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26785 \begin_layout Section
26787 \begin_inset Index idx
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 \begin_layout Standard
26800 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26813 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26815 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26816 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26817 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26830 \begin_inset space ~
26835 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26838 \begin_layout Standard
26839 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26840 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26843 \begin_layout Standard
26844 This is a line with an inline formula
26845 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26853 paragraph, like this one:
26854 \begin_inset Formula
26861 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26866 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26868 For example, typing
26869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26882 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26883 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26887 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26890 \begin_inset space ~
26898 \begin_layout Subsection
26899 Navigating in Formulas
26900 \begin_inset Index idx
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 \begin_layout Standard
26913 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26914 achieved with the arrow keys.
26916 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26917 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26922 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26923 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26927 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26931 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26934 \end{array}\right]$
26942 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26947 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26948 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26956 , printed in this document as
26957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26961 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26968 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26969 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26970 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26975 For example, if you want
26976 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26984 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26998 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27003 , since in the latter case only the
27006 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27011 will be under the square root sign:
27012 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27018 \begin_layout Standard
27019 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27021 \begin_inset Formula
27023 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27032 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27033 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27036 \begin_layout Subsection
27040 \begin_layout Standard
27041 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27042 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27046 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27047 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27048 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27049 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27050 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27054 \begin_layout Subsection
27055 Exponents and Subscripts
27056 \begin_inset Index idx
27059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 \begin_inset Index idx
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 \begin_layout Standard
27079 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27082 arg "math-superscript"
27088 arg "math-subscript"
27091 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27093 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27096 , type in a formula
27099 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27109 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27115 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27119 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27125 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27131 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27140 , you have to use an extra
27144 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27145 For example, if you want
27146 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27158 Subscripts are similar: To get
27159 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27173 \begin_layout Subsection
27175 \begin_inset Index idx
27178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27188 Create a fraction either with the command
27194 or by using the icon
27197 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27203 \begin_inset space ~
27209 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27210 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27211 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27216 To move back up, press
27221 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27222 \begin_inset Formula
27224 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27227 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27235 \begin_layout Subsection
27237 \begin_inset Index idx
27240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 Roots can be created using the
27253 \begin_inset space ~
27261 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27267 arg "math-insert \\root"
27289 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27295 always produces a square root.
27298 \begin_layout Subsection
27299 Operators with Limits
27300 \begin_inset Index idx
27303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27310 \begin_inset Index idx
27313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27322 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27329 \begin_layout Standard
27331 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27335 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27338 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27339 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27340 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27341 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27342 The sum operator will automatically place its
27343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27350 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27352 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27356 \begin_inset Formula
27358 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27363 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27367 \begin_layout Standard
27368 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27370 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27371 behind the operator and using the menu
27373 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27374 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27376 \begin_inset space ~
27380 \begin_inset space ~
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27395 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27404 \begin_inset Index idx
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 \begin_inset Formula
27416 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27421 which will place the
27422 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27434 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27435 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27441 \begin_layout Standard
27442 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27449 Have a look at section
27450 \begin_inset space ~
27454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27456 reference "subsec:Functions"
27460 for an explanation of function macros.
27463 \begin_layout Subsection
27465 \begin_inset Index idx
27468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27478 Most math symbols can be found in the
27481 \begin_inset space ~
27486 under one of several categories; including
27503 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27508 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27509 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27510 don't have to use the
27513 \begin_inset space ~
27518 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27520 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27523 \begin_layout Subsection
27525 \begin_inset Index idx
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27537 \begin_layout Standard
27538 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27544 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27550 \begin_inset space ~
27558 arg "math-insert \\space"
27562 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27563 For example, the sequence
27568 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27571 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27573 \begin_inset Graphics
27574 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27579 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27580 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27581 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27582 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27583 , because they are negative
27585 Here are two examples:
27588 \begin_layout Standard
27598 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27604 \begin_layout Standard
27614 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27620 \begin_layout Subsection
27622 \begin_inset Index idx
27625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27634 name "subsec:Functions"
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27645 \begin_inset space ~
27650 contains under the button
27653 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27656 a number of function macros, such as
27657 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27661 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27669 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27676 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27677 avoid confusions, because
27678 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27682 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27689 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27691 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27695 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27702 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27703 are placed, as described in section
27704 \begin_inset space ~
27708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27710 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27717 \begin_layout Subsection
27719 \begin_inset Index idx
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27731 \begin_layout Standard
27732 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27734 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27735 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27736 commands, for example, to enter
27737 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27740 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27741 Our example is entered by typing
27746 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27753 \begin_inset space ~
27757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27759 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27763 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 \begin_inset Float table
27774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27775 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27780 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27784 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 \begin_inset Tabular
27795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27937 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28045 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28099 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28153 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28315 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28360 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28382 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28385 \begin_inset space ~
28393 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28396 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28400 \begin_layout Section
28401 Brackets and Delimiters
28402 \begin_inset Index idx
28405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 \begin_inset Index idx
28415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28424 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28432 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28434 For some purposes, using just the keys
28439 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28440 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28441 toolbar delimiter icon
28444 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28448 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28449 \begin_inset Formula
28451 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28459 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28460 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28464 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28467 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28473 \begin_inset Formula
28475 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28483 \begin_layout Standard
28484 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28485 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28489 \begin_layout Standard
28490 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28491 left side and right side.
28492 If you use the option
28495 \begin_inset space ~
28500 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28501 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28503 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28508 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28509 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28512 \begin_layout Standard
28513 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28514 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28515 is to go inside the brackets.
28516 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28521 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28522 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28523 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28527 arg "math-delim ( )"
28533 \begin_layout Section
28534 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28535 \begin_inset Index idx
28538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28545 \begin_inset Index idx
28548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 \begin_inset Index idx
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28567 \begin_layout Standard
28568 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28572 \begin_inset space ~
28580 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28584 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28585 Here is an example:
28586 \begin_inset Formula
28588 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28597 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28598 \begin_inset space ~
28602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28604 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28609 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28610 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28611 This alignment is set in the box
28616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28665 for every column as default.
28666 For example, the sequence
28667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28678 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28679 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28680 corresponds to the relevant column.
28681 The result will look like this:
28682 \begin_inset Formula
28685 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28686 column & has & has\,right\\
28687 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28697 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28700 arg "newline-insert newline"
28703 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28704 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28709 or the math toolbar.
28712 \begin_layout Standard
28713 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28714 It can be created with the menu
28716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28717 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28719 \begin_inset space ~
28731 Here is an example:
28732 \begin_inset Formula
28746 \begin_layout Standard
28747 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28750 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28753 arg "newline-insert newline"
28757 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28762 arg "newline-insert newline"
28765 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28773 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28774 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28775 A new row is created by every further entry of
28778 arg "newline-insert newline"
28782 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28783 Here is an example:
28784 \begin_inset Formula
28786 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28787 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28792 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28793 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28794 \begin_inset Formula
28796 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28804 \begin_layout Standard
28805 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28812 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28813 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28816 reference "eq:asquared"
28821 The other types are described in section
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28828 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28835 \begin_layout Section
28836 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28837 \begin_inset Index idx
28840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28841 Math ! Formula numbering
28847 \begin_inset Index idx
28850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28851 Math ! Referencing formulas
28857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28859 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28866 \begin_layout Standard
28867 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28869 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28870 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 \begin_inset space ~
28876 \begin_inset space ~
28884 arg "math-number-toggle"
28888 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28889 within parentheses.
28890 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28891 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28892 the document class.
28893 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28894 separated by a dot:
28895 \begin_inset Formula
28905 arg "math-number-toggle"
28908 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28909 You can only number displayed formulas.
28912 \begin_layout Standard
28913 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28915 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28916 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 \begin_inset space ~
28922 \begin_inset space ~
28930 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28933 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28934 \begin_inset Formula
28937 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28943 To number all lines use the shortcut
28946 arg "math-number-toggle"
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28956 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28957 A label is inserted with the menu
28959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28968 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28969 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28970 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28982 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28983 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28984 We inserted in the following example the label
28985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 in the second line:
28993 \begin_inset Formula
28995 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28996 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29001 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29002 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29003 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29007 \begin_inset space ~
29015 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29019 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29020 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29021 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29022 as the formula number:
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29029 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29036 \begin_layout Standard
29037 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29038 's cross-reference box are described in section
29039 \begin_inset space ~
29043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29045 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29050 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29058 \begin_layout Section
29059 User defined math macros
29060 \begin_inset Index idx
29063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29072 \begin_layout Standard
29074 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29075 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29076 Math macros are explained in section
29079 \begin_inset space ~
29091 \begin_layout Section
29095 \begin_layout Subsection
29097 \begin_inset Index idx
29100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29110 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29111 To set a font in a formula, use the
29114 \begin_inset space ~
29122 arg "math-insert \\font"
29125 , or enter its command, listed in table
29126 \begin_inset space ~
29130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29132 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 \begin_inset Float table
29147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29148 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29153 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29157 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29167 \begin_inset Tabular
29168 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29169 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29203 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29257 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29290 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29317 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29339 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29345 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29346 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29359 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29375 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29437 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29445 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29508 \begin_layout Standard
29509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29517 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29520 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29522 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29526 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29545 \begin_layout Standard
29546 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29547 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29552 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29553 space when you need a space in the box.
29554 Here is an example where
29555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29566 denotes the set of numbers:
29567 \begin_inset Formula
29569 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29578 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29579 You can, for example, put a character in
29588 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29592 \begin_inset Newline newline
29595 So it is better not to use this feature.
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29599 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29600 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29604 \begin_inset Newline newline
29607 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29613 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29614 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29627 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29630 \begin_layout Standard
29631 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29633 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29634 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29636 \begin_inset space ~
29644 \begin_layout Subsection
29646 \begin_inset Index idx
29649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29658 \begin_layout Standard
29659 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29661 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29669 \begin_inset space ~
29677 \begin_inset space ~
29685 arg "math-insert \\font"
29689 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29690 in black instead of blue.
29691 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29692 Here is an example:
29693 \begin_inset Formula
29696 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29697 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29706 \begin_layout Subsection
29708 \begin_inset Index idx
29711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29721 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29722 automatically chosen in most situations.
29740 For most characters,
29748 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29749 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29754 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29755 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29756 thinks are appropriate.
29757 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29760 arg "math-insert \\style"
29764 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29765 For example, you can set
29766 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29769 , which is normally in
29778 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29782 The four styles are used in the following example:
29785 \begin_layout Standard
29786 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29790 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29794 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29798 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29804 \begin_layout Standard
29805 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29806 is set in a particular size with the menu
29808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29810 \begin_inset space ~
29815 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29816 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29817 will be adjusted to correspond.
29818 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29833 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29839 \begin_layout Section
29840 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29842 \begin_inset Index idx
29845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29852 \begin_inset Index idx
29855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29866 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29867 that are in common use.
29870 \begin_layout Subsection
29871 Enabling AMS-Support
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29875 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29877 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29893 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29894 selecting the checkbox
29897 \begin_inset space ~
29901 \begin_inset space ~
29905 \begin_inset space ~
29914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29918 \begin_inset Index idx
29921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29922 Document ! Settings
29930 \begin_inset space ~
29936 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29937 -errors in formulas,
29938 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29941 \begin_layout Subsection
29943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29945 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29950 \begin_inset Index idx
29953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29954 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29964 provides a selection of different formula types.
29966 allows you to choose between
29987 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29988 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29995 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29998 \begin_layout Chapter
30002 \begin_layout Section
30004 \begin_inset Index idx
30007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30016 name "sec:Cross-References"
30023 \begin_layout Standard
30024 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30025 's strengths is cross-references.
30026 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30028 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30029 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30030 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30033 \begin_layout Enumerate
30037 \begin_layout Enumerate
30038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30040 name "enu:Second-item"
30047 \begin_layout Enumerate
30051 \begin_layout Standard
30052 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30057 or by pressing the toolbar button
30064 A gray label box like this:
30065 \begin_inset Graphics
30066 filename clipart/label.png
30070 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30072 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30107 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30108 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30125 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30130 or the toolbar button
30133 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30137 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30138 \begin_inset Graphics
30139 filename clipart/reference.png
30143 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30145 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30158 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 As an alternative to
30165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30168 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30173 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30174 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30176 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30188 \begin_layout Standard
30189 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30196 reference "enu:Second-item"
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 It is recommended to use a protected space
30208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30209 described in section
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30216 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30225 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30226 line breaks between them.
30229 \begin_layout Standard
30230 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30233 \begin_layout Description
30234 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30237 reference "fig:Two-images"
30244 \begin_layout Description
30245 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30246 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30258 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30265 \begin_layout Description
30266 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30267 \begin_inset space ~
30271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30272 LatexCommand pageref
30273 reference "fig:Two-images"
30280 \begin_layout Description
30282 \begin_inset space ~
30286 \begin_inset space ~
30289 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30291 LatexCommand vpageref
30292 reference "fig:Two-images"
30297 \begin_inset Newline newline
30300 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30301 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30302 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30303 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30304 it prints “on the next page”.
30305 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30308 \begin_layout Description
30310 \begin_inset space ~
30314 \begin_inset space ~
30318 \begin_inset space ~
30321 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30324 reference "fig:Two-images"
30329 \begin_inset Newline newline
30332 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30338 ; otherwise it behaves like
30342 \begin_inset space ~
30346 \begin_inset space ~
30355 \begin_layout Description
30357 \begin_inset space ~
30360 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30361 \begin_inset Newline newline
30365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30373 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30383 \begin_inset Index idx
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 packages ! prettyref
30394 \begin_inset Index idx
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30399 packages ! refstyle
30410 \begin_inset Newline newline
30413 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30414 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30417 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30422 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30430 is the default and preferred because
30434 supports only English documents.
30435 The format is specified by using the command
30439 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30448 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30449 preamble of the document.
30450 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30468 \begin_inset Newline newline
30475 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30480 \begin_inset Newline newline
30491 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30492 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30494 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30495 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30500 , you might do so as follows:
30501 \begin_inset Newline newline
30508 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30509 format{prop}{Proposition
30514 \begin_inset Newline newline
30517 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30518 the package documentation
30519 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30521 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30527 \begin_inset Newline newline
30538 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30545 \begin_layout Description
30547 \begin_inset space ~
30550 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30552 LatexCommand nameref
30553 reference "fig:Two-images"
30560 \begin_layout Description
30562 \begin_inset space ~
30565 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 label for the reference:
30567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30568 LatexCommand labelonly
30569 reference "fig:Two-images"
30574 \begin_inset Newline newline
30577 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30578 Code, if you want to issue a command
30579 that \SpecialChar LyX
30585 , then you may want to use the
30588 \begin_inset space ~
30593 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30603 This is the form needed for e.
30604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30608 \begin_inset space \space{}
30615 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30616 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30618 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30622 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 You can only use the style
30631 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30635 is always possible.
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30639 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30640 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30642 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30643 \begin_inset space ~
30647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30649 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30661 \begin_inset space ~
30665 \begin_inset space ~
30670 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30671 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30672 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30675 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30678 \begin_inset space ~
30683 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30684 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30687 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30691 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30692 or, using the menu:
30694 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30695 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 You can change labels at any time.
30705 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30707 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30709 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30710 change them all manually
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30718 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 References are described in detail in the section
30734 \begin_layout Section
30735 Table of Contents and other Listings
30736 \begin_inset Index idx
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30746 \begin_inset Index idx
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 Navigating ! Outline
30756 \begin_inset Index idx
30759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30775 \begin_layout Subsection
30777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30779 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30787 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30790 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30796 \begin_inset space ~
30802 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30804 If you click on it, the
30808 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30809 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30810 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30812 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30814 \begin_inset space ~
30819 that is described in section
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30826 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30835 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30837 \begin_inset space ~
30841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30843 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30847 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30855 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30859 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30861 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30864 \begin_layout Subsection
30865 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30868 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30875 \begin_layout Standard
30876 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30878 You can insert them via the
30880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30881 List/Contents/References
30884 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30887 \begin_layout Section
30888 URLs and Hyperlinks
30889 \begin_inset Index idx
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_inset Index idx
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30911 \begin_layout Subsection
30913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30922 \begin_layout Standard
30923 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30932 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30934 \begin_inset Flex URL
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30939 https://www.lyx.org
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30954 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30976 \begin_layout Subsection
30978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30980 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30988 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30993 or with the toolbar button
31000 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31009 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31010 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31013 name "LyX's homepage"
31014 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31019 , an Email address like this:
31020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31022 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31023 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31029 , or a link to a file.
31034 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31042 \begin_layout Standard
31043 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31056 to the link target.
31059 \begin_layout Standard
31060 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31061 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31062 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31063 the text style dialog.
31064 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31070 name "LyX's homepage"
31071 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31079 \begin_layout Standard
31080 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31084 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31087 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31091 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31093 \begin_inset Newline newline
31101 \begin_inset Newline newline
31108 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31109 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31113 \begin_layout Section
31115 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31117 \begin_inset Index idx
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31129 name "sec:Counters"
31136 \begin_layout Standard
31138 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31139 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31140 is its ability to manage counters.
31141 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31142 modify counters directly.
31143 This can be done in
31144 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
31146 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
31149 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31150 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
31151 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31157 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31158 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31159 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31160 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31161 to set the section counter to four.
31168 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31169 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31170 These effects can also be limited to
31171 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
31173 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
31176 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31178 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
31179 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
31181 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
31184 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31188 \begin_layout Standard
31190 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31191 There are five commands you can use:
31194 \begin_layout Enumerate
31196 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31201 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31204 \begin_layout Enumerate
31206 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31211 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
31212 you choose a negative number)
31215 \begin_layout Enumerate
31217 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31222 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31225 \begin_layout Enumerate
31227 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31230 Save value of counter:
31232 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
31235 \begin_layout Enumerate
31237 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31240 Restore value of counter:
31242 Restores the previously saved value.
31245 \begin_layout Standard
31247 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31248 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31249 those that are available in the current document class.
31254 \begin_layout Section
31256 \begin_inset Index idx
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31268 name "sec:Appendices"
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 Appendices are created with the menu
31278 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31284 \begin_inset space ~
31290 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31291 as the appendix part of the book.
31292 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31295 \begin_layout Standard
31296 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31297 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31298 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31299 and the subsection number.
31300 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31312 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31320 \begin_inset space ~
31324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31326 reference "subsec:Export"
31333 \begin_layout Section
31335 \begin_inset Index idx
31338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31347 name "sec:Bibliography"
31354 \begin_layout Standard
31355 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31357 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31358 \begin_inset space ~
31362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31364 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31371 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31376 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31377 \begin_inset space ~
31381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31383 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31388 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31389 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31390 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31394 using a bibliography database.
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31399 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31403 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31404 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31405 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31406 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31407 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31410 \begin_layout Subsection
31411 The Bibliography Environment
31412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31414 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31426 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31428 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31437 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31439 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31440 of ASCII characters only.
31444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31449 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31455 \begin_inset Newline newline
31459 \begin_inset Flex URL
31462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31464 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31474 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31484 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31485 \begin_inset Newline newline
31492 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31493 the number of the entry.
31498 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31507 \begin_layout Standard
31508 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31513 or the toolbar button
31516 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31520 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31521 containing the available citations.
31522 Select one or more keys from the list and
31532 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31533 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31539 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31540 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31556 Companion Second Edition
31559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31561 key "latexcompanion"
31569 \begin_layout Standard
31570 The \SpecialChar LyX
31571 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31572 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31582 \begin_layout Standard
31583 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31590 \begin_inset Index idx
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31603 the label needs to be given the form
31604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31615 Author A and Author B(Year)
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31623 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31630 \begin_inset space ~
31635 in the document settings
31636 \begin_inset Index idx
31639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31640 Document ! Settings
31647 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31657 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31665 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31667 Once you have done that, the
31670 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
31672 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31675 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31692 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31693 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31694 These two are madatory.
31695 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31698 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31700 ) and in abrreviated form (
31707 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31708 add the abbreviated form to
31712 and the full list to the optional
31720 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31721 If specified like this,
31723 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31724 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31734 is specified, toggling
31735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31742 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31743 full and abbreviated list
31747 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31748 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31749 the citation references.
31750 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31756 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31759 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31769 arg "layout-paragraph"
31773 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31776 \begin_layout Subsection
31777 Bibliography databases
31778 \begin_inset Index idx
31781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 Bibliography ! Databases
31788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31790 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31804 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31806 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31807 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31812 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31814 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31815 your working field in a database.
31816 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31817 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31818 list for that document.
31819 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31824 The database is a text file with the file extension
31825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31836 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31837 The format is explained in
31838 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31845 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31849 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31855 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31856 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31857 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31859 \begin_inset Flex URL
31862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31864 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31872 \begin_layout Standard
31874 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31875 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31876 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31878 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31880 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31881 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31882 Those are addressed by
31887 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31892 packages ! biblatex
31898 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31899 (although it has been significantly
31900 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31910 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31911 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31912 might conversely fail to correctly
31913 handle databases that use specific
31922 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31926 \begin_layout Standard
31927 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31932 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31934 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31938 \begin_inset Index idx
31941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31942 Document ! Settings
31954 \begin_inset space ~
31959 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31968 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31970 \begin_inset Index idx
31973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31974 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31983 \begin_layout Standard
31984 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31988 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31990 \begin_inset space ~
31996 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31997 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32005 Add bibliography to TOC
32007 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
32012 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
32013 in the document or just the cited references.
32015 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
32020 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
32021 differ from the encoding of the document.
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32028 style file is a text file with the file extension
32029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32040 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32041 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32042 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32043 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32045 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32051 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32052 \begin_inset Newline newline
32056 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32058 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32068 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32073 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32078 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32081 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32083 \begin_inset Index idx
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32087 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32093 \begin_inset Index idx
32096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32098 packages ! biblatex
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32107 Accessing a database via
32111 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32113 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
32115 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
32120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32121 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32123 \begin_inset space ~
32129 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32130 you cannot select a
32135 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32139 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32142 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32143 As for the styles, note the following.
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32153 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32166 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32167 file (text file with the file extension
32168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32179 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32180 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32182 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32186 \begin_layout Standard
32191 styles are not set in the
32194 \begin_inset space ~
32199 dialog, but in the document settings.
32200 \begin_inset Index idx
32203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 Document ! Settings
32209 However, in the dialog in the
32213 field, which is only visible if you use
32217 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32218 example how its heading will appear).
32219 These options are described in detail in the
32224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32234 \begin_layout Standard
32235 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32236 \begin_inset space ~
32240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32242 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32253 Bibliography Processors
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32258 uses a bibliography processor,
32259 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32260 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32261 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32263 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32264 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32270 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32271 You can do this on a general level in
32273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32274 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32275 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32278 or for individual documents in
32280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32281 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32285 The following variants are available by default:
32288 \begin_layout Description
32289 biber a specific, modern processor
32290 \begin_inset Index idx
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32300 developed exclusively for
32304 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32310 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32315 makes use of; if you use the
32319 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32326 \begin_layout Description
32327 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32328 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32329 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32333 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32336 \begin_layout Description
32337 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32338 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32342 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32346 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32350 features are supported.
32353 \begin_layout Standard
32354 By default (with the
32360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32361 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32374 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32375 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32376 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32379 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32380 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32393 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32394 -based bibliography styles).
32395 This should suit most needs.
32398 \begin_layout Standard
32399 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32400 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32401 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32406 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32407 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32408 You can adjust it in
32410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32411 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32412 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32418 \begin_layout Standard
32419 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32420 can add below the selection.
32421 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32422 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32442 \begin_layout Standard
32444 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32446 These are explained in detail in section
32448 Customizing Bibliographies
32452 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32457 Additional Features
32460 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
32464 \begin_layout Subsection
32466 \begin_inset Index idx
32469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32470 Bibliography ! Citation format
32476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32478 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32485 \begin_layout Standard
32486 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32491 \begin_inset space \space{}
32494 numerical citation (as
32495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32502 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32510 ) or author-year citations (as
32511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32520 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32524 \begin_layout Standard
32525 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32529 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32533 \begin_inset Index idx
32536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32537 Document ! Settings
32542 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32548 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32549 labels, is there to use
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32563 \begin_inset space ~
32568 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32571 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 With a bibliography database (see
32580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32582 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32589 ) one has in contrary to the
32593 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32594 These style formats are available:
32597 \begin_layout Description
32599 \begin_inset space ~
32602 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32603 -based approached without any additional packages
32604 (simple numeric citations).
32607 \begin_layout Description
32608 Biblatex loads the package
32613 \begin_inset Index idx
32616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32618 packages ! biblatex
32623 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32625 Biblatex citation style
32629 Biblatex bibliography style
32632 Options to the package
32636 can be entered in the
32643 \begin_layout Description
32645 \begin_inset space ~
32649 \begin_inset space ~
32652 mode) loads the package
32656 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32657 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32669 behavior very closely.
32674 this option has some additional styles.
32679 styles are also supported by this variant.
32682 \begin_layout Description
32684 \begin_inset space ~
32687 (BibTeX) loads the package
32692 \begin_inset Index idx
32695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32705 \begin_layout Description
32707 \begin_inset space ~
32710 (BibTeX) loads the package
32715 \begin_inset Index idx
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32725 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32728 \begin_layout Standard
32737 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32739 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32748 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32750 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32751 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32753 Biblatex citation style
32756 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32762 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32766 \begin_layout Standard
32767 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32768 are available in the
32773 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32774 a name prefix such as
32775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32790 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32795 \begin_inset space \space{}
32799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32811 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32817 \begin_inset space \space{}
32820 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32826 \begin_inset space \space{}
32830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32842 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32846 \begin_inset space ~
32854 \begin_inset space ~
32860 Here is a simple example where the text
32861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32865 \begin_inset space ~
32869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32872 appears after the reference:
32875 \begin_layout Quote
32877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32880 key "latexcompanion"
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32889 All styles except for
32893 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32903 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32907 \begin_layout Standard
32908 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32909 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32910 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32915 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32916 multi-citation (so-called
32917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32920 qualified citation lists
32921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32927 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32932 dialog will display three columns in the field
32939 \begin_inset space ~
32947 \begin_inset space ~
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32961 If you double-click on an item's
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32972 \begin_inset space ~
32977 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32980 General text before
32986 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32989 \begin_layout Subsection
32991 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32994 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32998 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
33002 \begin_layout Standard
33004 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
33006 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
33009 \begin_inset space ~
33013 \begin_inset space ~
33017 \begin_inset space ~
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33024 Content\SpecialChar ldots
33027 context menu if specific conditions are met:
33030 \begin_layout Itemize
33032 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33033 If citation entries include any of the fields
33034 \begin_inset Flex Code
33037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33048 \begin_inset Flex Code
33051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33053 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33061 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33062 \begin_inset Flex Code
33065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33067 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33075 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33076 \begin_inset Flex Code
33079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33081 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33089 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33092 \begin_layout Itemize
33094 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33095 If citation entries include any of the fields
33096 \begin_inset Flex Code
33099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33109 (filled by JabRef) or
33110 \begin_inset Flex Code
33113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33115 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33123 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33124 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33125 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33130 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33131 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33132 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33135 Search drive for cited files
33139 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33140 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33141 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33146 It uses the tokens supplied at
33150 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33151 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
33152 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
33154 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
33156 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33157 of the file (at arbitrary position).
33159 opens the first matching file it finds.
33160 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33161 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33162 the chance this works for you.
33167 \begin_layout Standard
33169 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33170 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33171 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33173 \begin_inset Flex Code
33176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33178 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33187 \begin_inset Flex Code
33190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33192 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33200 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
33202 Customization manual
33207 Cite format description
33214 \begin_layout Section
33216 \begin_inset Index idx
33219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 \begin_inset space ~
33245 or the toolbar button
33252 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33253 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33254 by \SpecialChar LyX
33255 as the index entry.
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33259 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33262 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33264 \begin_inset space ~
33270 A light blue box labeled
33271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33282 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33283 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33287 \begin_layout Standard
33288 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33289 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33290 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33291 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33295 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33303 \begin_layout Subsection
33304 Grouping Index Entries
33305 \begin_inset Index idx
33308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33318 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33320 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33321 lists under the entry
33322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33330 First we create the entry
33331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33339 \begin_inset space ~
33343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33345 reference "subsec:Lists"
33350 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33351 \begin_inset space ~
33355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33357 reference "sec:Itemize"
33361 , we insert the command
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33370 \begin_layout Standard
33374 \begin_layout Standard
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 for the enumerated list in section
33382 \begin_inset space ~
33386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33388 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33395 \begin_layout Standard
33396 The exclamation mark
33397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33404 marks the grouping levels.
33405 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33406 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33407 If we don't have an index entry for
33408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33415 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33418 \begin_layout Subsection
33420 \begin_inset Index idx
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33424 Index ! Page ranges
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33433 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33435 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33436 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33437 an index entry in section
33438 \begin_inset space ~
33442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33444 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33454 Paragraph environments|(
33457 \begin_layout Standard
33458 and another entry at the end of section
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33465 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33472 \begin_layout Standard
33475 Paragraph environments|)
33478 \begin_layout Standard
33480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33503 respectively start and end the index range.
33504 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33505 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33506 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33507 An example is the index entry
33508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33511 Document ! Settings
33512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33518 \begin_layout Subsection
33520 \begin_inset Index idx
33523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 Index ! Cross referencing
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33533 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33534 We referred for example in the index entry
33535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33543 \begin_inset space ~
33547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33549 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33553 ) to the index entry
33554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33561 in the same section using the entry
33564 \begin_layout Standard
33567 GIF|see{Image formats}
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33571 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33573 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33574 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33577 \begin_layout Subsection
33579 \begin_inset Index idx
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 Index ! Entry order
33591 \begin_layout Standard
33592 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33593 follow the rules for the index order.
33594 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33600 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33608 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33617 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33618 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33643 \begin_inset Index idx
33646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 Dummy entries ! maïs
33653 \begin_inset Index idx
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 Dummy entries ! maître
33663 \begin_inset Index idx
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33667 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33672 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33673 maïs, maison, maître.
33674 To achieve this, we use the command
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33680 previous entry@current entry
33683 \begin_layout Standard
33684 In our case we want to have
33685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33700 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33703 \begin_layout Standard
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33710 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33711 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33713 See the next subsection for an example.
33716 \begin_layout Subsection
33718 \begin_inset Index idx
33721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 Index ! Entry layout
33730 \begin_layout Standard
33731 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33732 \begin_inset Index idx
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33738 This is an italic dummy entry
33743 You can also format the page number using the character
33744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33751 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33752 -command without a backslash.
33753 We can write for example
33756 \begin_layout Standard
33759 italic page number:|textit
33762 \begin_layout Standard
33763 to get the page number in italic.
33764 \begin_inset Index idx
33767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33768 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33773 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33774 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33798 Have a look at section
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33805 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33809 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33813 \begin_layout Standard
33814 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33826 to generate the index, see section
33827 \begin_inset space ~
33831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33833 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33842 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33847 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33848 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33851 key "latexcompanion"
33864 \begin_layout Standard
33865 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33867 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33868 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33869 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33870 If so, put the following in the preamble
33873 \begin_layout Standard
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33896 in the index entry.
33897 \begin_inset Index idx
33900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33901 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33906 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33907 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33908 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33913 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33914 a bold font for all index entries.
33915 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33927 documentation for details,
33928 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33930 key "makeindex,xindy"
33938 \begin_layout Subsection
33940 \begin_inset Index idx
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33952 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33959 \begin_layout Standard
33960 If the index generation program
33964 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33965 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33969 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33970 distribution, is used.
33974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33979 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33980 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33981 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33982 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33983 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33993 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33995 dialog, see section
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34002 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34007 The available options are listed and explained in
34008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34010 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
34016 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
34020 \begin_layout Standard
34021 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
34022 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
34025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34030 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
34031 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
34034 \begin_layout Subsection
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34040 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34048 next to the standard index.
34050 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34051 that add this feature.
34058 \begin_inset Index idx
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 packages ! splitidx
34068 package to generate multiple indexes.
34069 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34075 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34085 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34086 style, but it also includes
34087 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34088 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34096 \begin_layout Standard
34097 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34098 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34104 and select the option
34106 Use multiple Indexes
34113 already contains the standard index
34114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34122 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34123 also appear as a heading) to the
34127 input field and press the
34132 The new index now also appears in the list.
34133 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34134 label color to the new index.
34137 \begin_layout Standard
34138 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34142 List/Contents/References
34148 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34149 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34150 are additional features:
34153 \begin_layout Itemize
34154 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34155 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34158 \begin_layout Itemize
34159 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34160 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34165 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34166 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34167 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34168 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34171 \begin_layout Itemize
34176 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34177 code in the name of the index.
34180 \begin_layout Section
34181 Nomenclature/Glossary
34182 \begin_inset Index idx
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34192 \begin_inset Index idx
34195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34226 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34233 \begin_layout Standard
34234 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34235 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34236 called nomenclature or glossary.
34239 \begin_layout Standard
34240 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34247 \begin_inset Index idx
34250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34258 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34267 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34272 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34273 and then use the menu
34275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34286 or the toolbar button
34289 arg "nomencl-insert"
34294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34305 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34309 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34310 The first is the term or
34314 that you wish to define.
34319 of the term or symbol.
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34331 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34332 code for nomenclature entries the option
34336 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34344 \begin_layout Subsection
34345 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34346 \begin_inset Index idx
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34350 Nomenclature ! Layout
34358 \begin_layout Standard
34359 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34363 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34370 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34378 \begin_inset Newline newline
34386 \begin_inset Newline newline
34392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34399 character starts/ends the formula.
34400 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34401 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34413 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34425 syntax is given in section
34426 \begin_inset space ~
34430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34432 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34448 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34450 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34455 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34462 in this document is:
34463 \begin_inset Newline newline
34468 dummy entry for the character
34473 \begin_inset Newline newline
34485 \begin_inset space ~
34495 font use the command
34524 \begin_layout Standard
34525 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34530 \begin_inset space \space{}
34534 \begin_inset Newline newline
34550 \begin_inset Newline newline
34553 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34554 This command will make the font of all symbols
34561 \begin_inset space ~
34569 \begin_layout Standard
34570 If the characters |
34571 \begin_inset space \space{}
34575 \begin_inset space \space{}
34579 \begin_inset space \space{}
34583 \begin_inset space \space{}
34587 \begin_inset space \space{}
34590 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34591 code they need to be escaped
34593 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34595 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34598 character in front of them.
34599 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34601 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34602 LatexCommand nomenclature
34603 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34604 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34610 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34612 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34613 LatexCommand nomenclature
34614 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34615 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34626 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34627 \begin_inset Index idx
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34631 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34641 -code of the symbol
34643 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34645 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34648 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34649 LatexCommand nomenclature
34651 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34659 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34663 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34664 LatexCommand nomenclature
34667 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34673 They will be sorted by
34674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34700 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34703 will be sorted before the
34707 since the character
34708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34715 is considered in sorting.
34718 \begin_layout Standard
34719 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34727 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34728 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34730 For the example given, you can insert
34734 in this field for the
34735 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34742 will be located before
34743 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34749 \begin_layout Standard
34750 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34765 \begin_layout Subsection
34766 Nomenclature Options
34767 \begin_inset Index idx
34770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34771 Nomenclature ! Options
34777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34779 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34791 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34792 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34795 \begin_layout Description
34796 refeq Appends the phrase
34797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34812 to every nomenclature entry, where
34818 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34821 \begin_layout Description
34822 refpage Appends the phrase
34823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34838 to every nomenclature entry, where
34844 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34847 \begin_layout Description
34848 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34852 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34853 class options list in the
34855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34859 In this document the options
34866 \begin_layout Standard
34867 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34874 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34875 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34880 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34883 \begin_layout Description
34893 \begin_layout Description
34896 nomrefpage Like the
34903 \begin_layout Description
34906 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34915 \begin_layout Description
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34930 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34933 \begin_layout Standard
34935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34942 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34943 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34947 \begin_layout Standard
34956 \begin_inset Newline newline
34962 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34978 unskip, see equation
34981 \begin_inset Newline newline
34988 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34989 \begin_inset Newline newline
34995 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35025 in the document settings under
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_layout Standard
35044 \begin_inset Newline newline
35048 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35052 \begin_inset space ~
35064 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35066 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35067 \begin_inset Newline newline
35074 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35075 \begin_inset Newline newline
35079 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35095 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35100 \begin_layout Subsection
35101 Printing the Nomenclature
35102 \begin_inset Index idx
35105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35106 Nomenclature ! Printing
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35115 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35118 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35134 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35135 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35136 You can choose between these settings:
35139 \begin_layout Description
35140 Default a space of 1
35141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35147 \begin_layout Description
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35153 \begin_inset space ~
35156 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35159 \begin_layout Description
35160 Custom custom space
35163 \begin_layout Standard
35164 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35173 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35181 For example, in order to change the name to
35185 , add the following line to the preamble:
35188 \begin_layout Standard
35201 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35204 \begin_layout Standard
35205 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35206 \begin_inset Newline newline
35221 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35224 \begin_layout Subsection
35225 Nomenclature Program
35226 \begin_inset Index idx
35229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35230 Nomenclature ! Program
35236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35238 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35251 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35252 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35254 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35259 by adding options, see section
35260 \begin_inset space ~
35264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35266 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35271 The available options are listed and explained in
35272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35274 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35282 \begin_layout Section
35284 \begin_inset Index idx
35287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35294 \begin_inset Index idx
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 Document ! Branches
35304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35306 name "sec:Branches"
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35315 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35316 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35317 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35321 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35322 allows you to put text into branches.
35323 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35324 To create a branch, either select the menu
35326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35327 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35330 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35339 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35340 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35341 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35342 and whether the name of the branch should
35343 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35344 (see below for an example).
35345 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35346 to the name of the other) and to add
35347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35359 \begin_inset space ~
35362 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35363 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35368 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35373 where you can choose a branch.
35374 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35380 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 \begin_inset Branch Question
35388 \begin_layout Standard
35393 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35406 \begin_layout Standard
35411 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35427 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35430 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35431 Consider for example a file
35432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35439 which has the above branches.
35441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35448 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35472 branch were inactive,
35473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35488 branch was active, likewise
35489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35504 branch was active, and
35505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35508 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35512 if both branches were active.
35513 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35514 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35521 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35527 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
35528 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
35532 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
35534 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
35537 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35538 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35568 branch is deactivated.
35574 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35582 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35583 definitions for each branch.
35584 For example you can define for the question branch
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35589 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35590 -syntax, see section
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35597 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35619 \begin_layout Standard
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 and for the answer branch
35633 \begin_layout Standard
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35654 \begin_inset Branch Question
35658 \begin_layout Standard
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35691 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35695 \begin_layout Standard
35699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35727 \begin_layout Standard
35728 Now it is possible to use the
35732 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35739 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35742 commands to obtain conditional output.
35743 Here is an example formula where only the
35750 \begin_inset Formula
35752 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35776 \begin_inset space \space{}
35779 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35781 For this advanced usage, see the
35787 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35792 \begin_layout Section
35794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35796 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35801 \begin_inset Index idx
35804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35815 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
35820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35825 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
35828 allows you to set up
35829 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
35831 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
35835 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
35837 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
35841 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
35845 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
35850 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
35852 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
35856 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
35858 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
35861 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35863 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
35865 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
35873 \begin_inset Index idx
35876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35878 packages ! hyperref
35884 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
35885 which you need to enable by clicking
35887 Use Hyperref Support
35889 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
35890 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
35893 Customize Hyperref Options
35896 Among other things, hyperref
35897 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
35901 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
35903 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
35907 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
35911 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
35914 cross-references in the
35915 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
35919 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
35921 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
35925 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35926 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
35929 table of contents entry or on a reference to
35930 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
35931 open a website or to
35933 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
35935 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
35936 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
35937 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
35942 \begin_layout Standard
35943 The header information in the dialog tab
35947 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35948 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
35949 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
35952 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35953 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35957 \begin_inset space ~
35961 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
35970 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
35973 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35991 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35996 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
35998 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
36006 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
36007 you can customize the
36008 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
36010 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
36014 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
36016 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
36020 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
36021 , and you can specify
36024 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
36026 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
36027 will look and if links for
36029 bibliographical backreferences are created
36030 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
36036 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
36037 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36056 option allows long links to be split;
36059 \begin_inset space ~
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36080 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36088 colors the different links.
36089 The default colors are:
36092 \begin_layout Labeling
36093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36098 for hyperlinks and URLs
36101 \begin_layout Labeling
36102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36110 \begin_layout Labeling
36111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 but you can change these in the
36121 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
36123 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
36129 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
36131 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
36137 For example, in this document they were changed with the
36138 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
36142 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
36152 \begin_layout Quote
36155 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
36158 \begin_layout Standard
36160 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
36165 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
36166 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
36167 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
36172 \begin_layout Standard
36177 you can specify if PDF
36178 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
36180 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
36184 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
36185 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
36187 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
36188 readers to navigate through the document.
36189 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
36192 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
36194 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
36198 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
36204 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
36206 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
36208 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
36211 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
36220 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
36221 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
36222 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
36223 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
36224 when opening the PDF.
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36231 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36235 1 will only display the sections
36236 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
36237 (collapsing the rest)
36240 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
36244 \begin_layout Standard
36246 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
36251 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
36252 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36261 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
36262 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
36263 \begin_inset Flex Code
36266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
36278 , not via the package options.
36279 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
36280 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
36283 \begin_layout Quote
36285 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
36288 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option1
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36295 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
36298 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36299 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36302 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36309 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
36314 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
36315 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
36317 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
36318 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
36320 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
36323 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
36326 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
36327 and not very well documented (look for a file called
36329 documentmetadata-support.pdf
36331 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
36332 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
36333 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36338 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
36339 PDF properties are also used in this document.
36340 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
36346 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
36347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36359 \begin_layout Section
36361 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36365 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36372 \begin_layout Subsection
36375 \begin_inset Index idx
36378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36388 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36395 \begin_layout Standard
36396 As \SpecialChar LyX
36397 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36398 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36399 commands and constructs,
36402 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36403 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36404 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36405 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36406 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36407 cannot support all packages and
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36413 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36414 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36418 Code box is created by the menu
36420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36427 or by the toolbar button
36440 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36448 \begin_layout Standard
36449 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36451 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36453 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36463 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36470 , you can write the command part
36476 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36477 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36481 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36482 Code box behind the word.
36483 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36484 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36489 \begin_inset Graphics
36490 filename clipart/ERT.png
36498 \begin_layout Standard
36502 \begin_layout Standard
36503 This is a line with a
36507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36539 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36540 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36541 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36542 know that the command is finished.
36550 \begin_layout Subsection
36551 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36553 \begin_inset Argument 1
36556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36557 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36564 \begin_inset Index idx
36567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36577 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
36586 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36587 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36588 uses in the background.
36589 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36590 is based on commands, you can
36591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36599 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
36600 any time if you know the right commands.
36601 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
36602 is the end of the day.
36603 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
36604 all caption labels bold.
36605 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36607 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36611 \begin_layout Standard
36612 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36614 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36616 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36629 \begin_layout Standard
36630 As result you find that the package
36635 \begin_inset Index idx
36638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36646 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36651 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36655 \begin_inset space ~
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36668 usepackage[options]{package name}
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36672 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36673 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36674 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36675 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36678 \begin_layout Standard
36679 In your case the package name is
36684 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36689 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36690 So you add the command
36693 \begin_layout Standard
36698 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36701 \begin_layout Standard
36702 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36707 For more commands provided by the
36711 package, have a look at its documentation,
36712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36728 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36730 For example if you use a
36734 class, you don't need the package
36738 , you can instead write
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36746 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36751 \begin_layout Standard
36752 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36753 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36754 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36761 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36764 \begin_layout Standard
36765 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36766 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36768 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36769 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36770 Code box as described in the previous
36774 \begin_layout Standard
36775 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36776 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36781 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36796 \begin_layout Standard
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36810 \begin_inset Note Note
36813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36814 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36822 \begin_layout Left Header
36823 \begin_inset Argument 1
36826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36846 \begin_inset Note Note
36849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 defines the header line as described below
36858 \begin_layout Center Header
36859 \begin_inset Argument 1
36862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36871 \begin_layout Right Header
36872 \begin_inset Argument 1
36875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36896 \begin_layout Left Footer
36897 \begin_inset Argument 1
36900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36921 \begin_layout Center Footer
36922 \begin_inset Argument 1
36925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36937 \begin_inset Newline newline
36941 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36947 \begin_layout Right Footer
36948 \begin_inset Argument 1
36951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36973 \begin_layout Section
36974 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36977 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36982 \begin_inset Index idx
36985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36986 Document ! Header/Footer line
36992 \begin_inset Index idx
36995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37005 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37032 As a second step add in the menu
37034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37035 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37044 Custom Header/Footerlines
37047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37051 This module offers the following 6
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37058 \begin_layout Description
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_inset space ~
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_layout Description
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37096 \begin_inset space ~
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 for the different positions in the header/footer.
37108 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37112 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
37113 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37121 reference "fig:Page-layout"
37125 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 \begin_inset Float figure
37136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37139 \begin_inset Tabular
37140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
37141 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
37142 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37144 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37146 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
37158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37164 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37193 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37204 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
37207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37208 The normal text on the page goes here.
37209 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
37211 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
37212 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
37217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37226 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37255 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
37278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37284 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
37304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37307 name "fig:Page-layout"
37311 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37333 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37342 is set to “Default”.
37343 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
37352 \begin_layout Subsection
37356 \begin_layout Standard
37357 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
37358 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
37359 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
37360 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37362 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37364 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37369 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37383 \begin_layout Description
37386 thepage prints the current page number
37389 \begin_layout Description
37392 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37395 \begin_layout Description
37398 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37401 \begin_layout Description
37404 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37405 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37412 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37415 because it usually goes in a left header.
37418 \begin_layout Description
37421 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37422 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37424 It is normally used in the right header.
37427 \begin_layout Subsection
37428 Default header/footer
37431 \begin_layout Standard
37432 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37433 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37434 footer has the page number.
37435 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37436 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37437 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_layout Subsection
37452 \begin_layout Standard
37453 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37454 Some pages are different.
37455 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37456 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37457 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37458 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37459 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37462 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37463 Header and footer decoration line
37466 \begin_layout Standard
37467 By default, you get a 0.4
37468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37471 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37472 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37484 in the following way:
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37494 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37511 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37518 \begin_layout Standard
37519 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37521 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37537 Several header/footer lines
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37542 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37543 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37545 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_layout Standard
37578 headheight}{height}
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37586 is a size in standard units (e.
37587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37591 \begin_inset space \space{}
37599 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37600 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37601 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37602 logfile with the menu
37604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37619 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37624 \begin_inset Index idx
37627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37629 packages ! fancyhdr
37635 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37636 for your header/footer.
37639 \begin_layout Subsection
37643 \begin_layout Standard
37644 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37645 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37646 This example consists of the following definition:
37649 \begin_layout Description
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37660 , empty optional argument
37663 \begin_layout Description
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37668 Header empty, empty optional argument
37671 \begin_layout Description
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37682 in the optional argument
37685 \begin_layout Description
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37696 in the optional argument
37699 \begin_layout Description
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37718 \begin_inset Newline newline
37722 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37729 in the optional argument
37732 \begin_layout Description
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37743 , empty optional argument
37746 \begin_layout Description
37749 headrulewidth set to 2
37750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37758 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37774 \begin_layout Standard
37775 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37781 \begin_layout Standard
37785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37789 pagestyle{headings}
37795 \begin_inset Note Note
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37799 switches back to page style with the default headings
37807 \begin_layout Section
37808 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37811 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37816 \begin_inset Index idx
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_inset Index idx
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37840 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37841 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37842 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37845 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37856 \begin_inset Index idx
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37861 packages ! preview-latex
37866 (on some systems named simply
37871 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37880 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37882 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37890 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37891 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37892 -package are automatically
37893 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37897 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37903 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37905 activate the option
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37915 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37928 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37953 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37956 \begin_layout Standard
37957 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37962 \begin_inset space ~
37970 \begin_inset space ~
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37979 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37980 and when you finish
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37993 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37994 generated by activating the option
37997 \begin_inset space ~
38003 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
38011 \begin_layout Subsection
38012 Selected document parts
38015 \begin_layout Standard
38016 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
38017 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
38018 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
38019 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38021 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
38023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38027 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
38028 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
38029 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38033 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38040 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38052 is explained in section
38054 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
38059 \begin_inset space ~
38069 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
38070 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38071 the final rotated boxes,
38072 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
38073 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
38075 Here is the result:
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 \begin_inset Preview
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38090 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
38096 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
38106 height_special "totalheight"
38111 backgroundcolor "none"
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38139 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
38145 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
38152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 Previewing works also for colors.
38169 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 is explained in section
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38209 \begin_inset Preview
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38234 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
38239 This is text within a colored, framed box.
38243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 \begin_layout Standard
38259 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 If \SpecialChar LyX
38267 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
38268 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
38269 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
38270 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38271 packages in your document preamble that are required by
38272 the \SpecialChar TeX
38274 If \SpecialChar LyX
38275 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
38276 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
38278 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
38279 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
38280 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
38283 \begin_layout Subsection
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38289 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38290 source of the whole document or parts of it.
38293 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38300 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38302 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
38304 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
38305 's main window, then only this selection
38306 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
38307 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
38308 the source view window.
38313 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38314 ; but note that if you have
38315 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38317 not just the one which is open at the time.
38320 \begin_layout Section
38321 Advanced Find and Replace
38322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38324 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38329 \begin_inset Index idx
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 \begin_inset Index idx
38342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38351 \begin_layout Subsection
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38356 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38357 allows for searching of complex,
38358 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38360 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38361 The key-features are:
38364 \begin_layout Itemize
38365 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38366 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38367 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38371 \begin_layout Itemize
38372 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38373 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38374 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38375 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38378 \begin_layout Itemize
38379 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38380 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38381 outside of mathematics environments
38384 \begin_layout Itemize
38385 Search may be widened to a specific
38390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38397 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38398 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38405 \begin_layout Itemize
38406 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38407 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38412 \begin_inset space ~
38415 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38418 \begin_layout Subsection
38422 \begin_layout Standard
38423 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38438 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38441 ) or the toolbar button
38444 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38450 Advanced Find and Replace
38455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38459 \begin_layout Standard
38465 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38469 \begin_inset space ~
38474 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38477 arg "paragraph-break"
38481 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38482 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38486 arg "paragraph-break"
38489 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38493 searches backwards.
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38505 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38519 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38523 Searching for mathematics
38526 \begin_layout Standard
38527 Mathematical formulas, such as
38528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38531 or something more complex like
38532 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38535 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38540 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38541 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38542 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38543 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38553 \begin_layout Standard
38554 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38555 This is done by switching to the
38559 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38564 This way, entering in the
38571 \begin_layout Itemize
38572 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38573 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38576 \begin_layout Itemize
38577 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38578 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38581 \begin_layout Itemize
38582 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38583 of it only within section headings.
38584 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38585 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38589 \begin_layout Itemize
38590 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38591 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38598 \begin_layout Standard
38599 The entries made in the
38603 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38612 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38616 button or alternatively press
38619 arg "paragraph-break"
38626 while the cursor is in the
38629 \begin_inset space ~
38637 \begin_layout Standard
38638 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38640 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38644 \begin_layout Itemize
38645 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38646 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38654 with its typewriter version
38655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38669 \begin_layout Itemize
38670 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38676 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38688 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38695 (you may want to enable the
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38711 options and disable the
38719 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38727 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38728 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38732 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38735 , or occurrences of
38736 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38740 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38746 \begin_layout Subsection
38750 \begin_layout Standard
38751 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38756 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38758 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38760 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38770 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38776 This is done with the context menu
38778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38779 Insert Regular Expression
38781 while the cursor is in the
38786 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38787 expression matching rules
38791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38802 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38803 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38809 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38810 same text in the document.
38811 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38812 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38815 \begin_layout Enumerate
38816 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38821 editor the fraction
38822 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38826 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38829 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38830 fractions with the given denominator.
38833 \begin_layout Enumerate
38834 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38846 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38851 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38852 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38853 Also, by inserting a
38854 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38857 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38858 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38861 \begin_layout Standard
38862 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38863 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38864 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38867 , and referring back to them through
38868 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38872 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38876 For example, try searching with the regexp
38877 \begin_inset Newline newline
38880 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38883 \begin_inset Newline newline
38886 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38889 \begin_layout Standard
38890 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38903 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38904 sub-expressions is absolute.
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38910 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38913 always refers to the first occurrence of
38914 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38917 in all entered regexps.
38925 \begin_layout Section
38927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38929 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38934 \begin_inset Index idx
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 \begin_layout Standard
38948 has a built-in spell checker.
38951 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38958 key or the toolbar button
38961 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38964 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38965 beginning of the currently selected text.
38966 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38967 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38968 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38969 scrolled so that it is visible.
38970 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38971 n, if any could be found.
38972 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38976 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38977 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38980 \begin_layout Standard
38981 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38988 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38989 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38991 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38992 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38995 \begin_inset space ~
39003 arg "dialog-show character"
39006 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
39008 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
39011 \begin_layout Standard
39012 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
39013 can be downloaded from here:
39014 \begin_inset Newline newline
39018 \begin_inset Flex URL
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
39025 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
39026 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
39027 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
39035 \begin_inset Newline newline
39039 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
39041 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
39042 You should download
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39048 files for each language
39049 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
39054 link at the end of the opened webpage)
39057 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
39058 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
39062 \begin_inset space ~
39065 files into \SpecialChar LyX
39066 's installation subfolder
39074 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39076 \begin_inset Newline newline
39079 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
39080 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
39081 but in most cases these are
39097 is the language code.
39100 \begin_layout Subsection
39104 \begin_layout Standard
39107 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39108 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39116 you can set the following things:
39119 \begin_layout Description
39121 \begin_inset space ~
39124 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
39125 should use for spell checking.
39126 Depending on your platform,
39136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
39138 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39156 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
39159 \begin_layout Description
39161 \begin_inset space ~
39164 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
39165 will always use the given language
39166 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
39169 \begin_layout Description
39171 \begin_inset space ~
39174 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
39176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39180 \begin_inset space \space{}
39184 This should normally not be needed.
39187 \begin_layout Description
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39196 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
39198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39208 \begin_layout Description
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39213 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39214 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39215 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
39216 appear in a context menu.
39217 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
39221 \begin_layout Description
39223 \begin_inset space ~
39227 \begin_inset space ~
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39234 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
39238 \begin_layout Section
39240 \begin_inset Index idx
39243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39252 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39259 \begin_layout Standard
39261 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39262 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39274 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39284 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39286 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
39287 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39288 which are available for many languages.
39291 \begin_layout Standard
39292 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
39293 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39297 \begin_layout Subsection
39298 Setting up the thesaurus
39301 \begin_layout Standard
39310 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39314 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39319 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39333 For instance, the US English files are named:
39336 \begin_layout Itemize
39340 \begin_layout Itemize
39344 \begin_layout Standard
39353 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39354 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39357 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39358 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39359 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39361 \begin_inset space ~
39366 ) to the path where they are installed.
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39371 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39372 ies, typical locations are
39378 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39382 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39386 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39389 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39395 LibreOffice-<Version>
39402 On the Mac, the default location is
39404 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39405 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39406 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39407 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39408 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39409 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39417 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39418 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39419 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39423 \begin_layout Standard
39424 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39426 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39428 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39431 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39432 \begin_inset Newline newline
39436 \begin_inset Flex URL
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
39443 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39444 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
39445 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
39455 \begin_layout Standard
39456 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39457 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39461 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39468 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39470 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39471 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39475 \begin_layout Standard
39476 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39478 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39481 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39487 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39490 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39491 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39499 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39500 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39501 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39508 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39511 \begin_layout Subsection
39512 Using the thesaurus
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39516 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39521 or the toolbar button
39524 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39527 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39529 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39531 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39532 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39533 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39542 ), related terms (such as
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39554 ), compounds (such as
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39566 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39575 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39579 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39580 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39584 \begin_layout Standard
39585 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39586 the dictionary, such as the above
39590 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39595 \begin_inset space \space{}
39598 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39599 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39600 For example, looking up the word form
39604 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39609 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39614 \begin_inset space \space{}
39625 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39626 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39627 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39630 \begin_layout Section
39632 \begin_inset Index idx
39635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 \begin_inset Index idx
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39646 Document ! Change Tracking
39652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39654 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39663 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39664 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39665 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39672 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39674 \begin_inset space ~
39682 \begin_layout Standard
39683 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39697 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39698 You can change the color in
39700 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39701 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39712 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39718 \begin_inset Index idx
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Color ! Change tracking
39727 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39728 's status bar when the
39729 cursor is in changed text.
39730 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39733 arg "changes-merge"
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39740 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39742 \begin_inset Index idx
39745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39761 \begin_layout Standard
39762 \begin_inset Graphics
39763 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39771 \begin_layout Standard
39772 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39783 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39790 \begin_inset Tabular
39791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39792 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39793 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39794 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39804 arg "changes-track"
39812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39823 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 arg "changes-output"
39851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39859 \begin_inset space ~
39862 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 Jumps to the next change
39908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39917 arg "change-accept"
39925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39936 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39956 arg "change-reject"
39964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39975 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39995 arg "changes-merge"
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40034 arg "all-changes-accept"
40042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40050 \begin_inset space ~
40053 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 arg "all-changes-reject"
40085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40096 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40135 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40169 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40194 \begin_layout Standard
40195 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
40217 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40218 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
40219 the next change after the current cursor position.
40220 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40221 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
40222 step to the next change.
40223 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40226 \begin_layout Standard
40227 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
40228 to describe a change.
40231 \begin_layout Standard
40233 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
40234 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40240 \begin_inset Index idx
40243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40251 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40253 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40260 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40266 \begin_layout Section
40267 Comparison of Documents
40268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40270 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40275 \begin_inset Index idx
40278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 Comparison of documents
40287 \begin_layout Standard
40288 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40295 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40296 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40298 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40300 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40329 \begin_inset space ~
40333 \begin_inset space ~
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40341 \begin_inset space ~
40346 enables the change tracking option
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40362 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40365 \begin_layout Section
40366 International Support
40367 \begin_inset Index idx
40370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40371 International support
40379 \begin_layout Standard
40380 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40381 with any language you want.
40382 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40383 up \SpecialChar LyX
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40387 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40395 \begin_layout Standard
40396 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40397 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40404 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40411 \begin_layout Subsection
40413 \begin_inset Index idx
40416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40423 \begin_inset Index idx
40426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40427 Document ! Settings
40433 \begin_inset Index idx
40436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40437 Document ! Language
40445 \begin_layout Standard
40448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40452 dialog lets you set
40454 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40464 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40474 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40475 For details about the different encoding options see section
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40482 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40489 \begin_layout Subsection
40490 Keyboard mapping configuration
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40493 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40500 \begin_layout Standard
40501 If you have for example a U.
40502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40505 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40506 can use an alternate keymap.
40507 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40513 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40514 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40517 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40524 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40529 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40530 which one you want to use.
40533 \begin_layout Standard
40534 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40535 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40536 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40540 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40541 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40542 one to support the characters you want.
40543 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40550 \begin_layout Chapter
40553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40555 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40562 \begin_layout Standard
40563 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40564 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40565 topic inside the user's guide.
40568 \begin_layout Section
40570 \begin_inset Index idx
40573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40582 \begin_layout Standard
40587 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40590 \begin_layout Subsection
40594 \begin_layout Standard
40595 Creates a new document.
40598 \begin_layout Subsection
40602 \begin_layout Standard
40603 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40604 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40605 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40607 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
40608 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
40614 \begin_layout Subsection
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40622 \begin_layout Subsection
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40627 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40628 Click there on a file to open it.
40631 \begin_layout Subsection
40633 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
40637 \begin_layout Standard
40639 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
40640 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
40644 \begin_layout Subsection
40648 \begin_layout Standard
40649 Closes the current document.
40652 \begin_layout Subsection
40656 \begin_layout Standard
40657 Closes all opened documents.
40660 \begin_layout Subsection
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 Saves the actual document.
40668 \begin_layout Subsection
40672 \begin_layout Standard
40673 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40674 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40678 \begin_layout Subsection
40680 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40686 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40687 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40693 \begin_layout Subsection
40697 \begin_layout Standard
40698 Saves all opened documents.
40701 \begin_layout Subsection
40705 \begin_layout Standard
40706 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40709 \begin_layout Subsection
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40714 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40715 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40716 It is described in the section
40718 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40723 Additional Features
40728 \begin_layout Subsection
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40734 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40736 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40737 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40741 \begin_layout Standard
40742 When using the menu entry
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40750 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40767 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40768 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40771 \begin_layout Subsection
40773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40775 name "subsec:Export"
40782 \begin_layout Standard
40783 You can export your document to various file formats.
40784 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40786 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40787 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40788 during its configuration.
40791 \begin_layout Standard
40792 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40800 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40807 \begin_layout Description
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40816 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40821 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40822 \begin_inset Newline newline
40825 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40826 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40830 \begin_layout Description
40831 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40837 \begin_layout Description
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40842 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40848 \begin_layout Description
40849 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40850 's native DVI-format.
40851 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40852 files paths or file names in your document.
40854 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40861 \begin_layout Description
40862 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
40863 in files paths or file names
40866 \begin_layout Description
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40875 ) DVI-format using the program
40877 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40880 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40892 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40900 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40905 (cropped) the same as
40909 but with cropped page margins.
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40917 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40921 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40926 \begin_layout Description
40930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40938 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40946 \begin_layout Description
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40955 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40959 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40967 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40980 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40981 source that is compilable with the program
40983 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40987 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40996 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40997 source, additionally all images used in the document
40998 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
41002 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
41005 \begin_layout Description
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41014 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41015 source code, additionally all images used in the document
41016 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
41024 \begin_layout Description
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41037 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41038 source that is compilable with the program
41044 \begin_layout Description
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41057 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41058 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
41064 \begin_layout Description
41066 \begin_inset space ~
41069 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41070 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41076 \begin_inset space \space{}
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41100 represent the version number)
41103 \begin_layout Description
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
41113 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
41114 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41118 \begin_layout Description
41119 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41120 's internal XHTML engine
41123 \begin_layout Description
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41140 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
41145 For the conversion the program
41154 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41157 \begin_layout Description
41158 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41163 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41168 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
41170 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
41173 For the conversion the program
41182 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41185 \begin_layout Description
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41190 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41191 For the conversion the program
41200 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41203 \begin_layout Description
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41208 (cropped) the same as
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41216 but with cropped page margins
41219 \begin_layout Description
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41228 PDF-format using the program
41232 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41235 \begin_layout Description
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41256 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41261 \begin_inset space \space{}
41264 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41268 \begin_layout Description
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41277 PDF-format using the program
41279 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41282 , produces PDF-files directly
41285 \begin_layout Description
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41294 PDF-format using the program
41298 , produces PDF-files directly
41301 \begin_layout Description
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41310 PDF-format using the program
41314 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41317 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41326 PDF-format using the program
41331 , produces PDF-files directly
41334 \begin_layout Description
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_layout Description
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41359 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41360 and then exported as text using the program
41365 \begin_layout Description
41370 PostScript format using the program
41378 options see section
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41385 reference "subsec:General-output"
41392 \begin_layout Description
41393 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41394 source and also code in the statistical programming
41408 it is possible to use
41412 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41416 \begin_layout Standard
41417 If one of the menu entries
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41433 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41435 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41443 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41448 \begin_inset Index idx
41451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41452 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41461 \begin_layout Subsection
41465 \begin_layout Standard
41466 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41467 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41476 reference "sec:Paths"
41481 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41490 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41491 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41492 's preferences as described in section
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41499 reference "subsec:Converters"
41506 \begin_layout Subsection
41507 New and Close Window
41510 \begin_layout Standard
41511 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41515 \begin_layout Subsection
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41520 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41523 \begin_layout Section
41525 \begin_inset Index idx
41528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41537 \begin_layout Subsection
41541 \begin_layout Standard
41542 Described in section
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41549 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41556 \begin_layout Subsection
41557 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
41560 \begin_layout Standard
41561 Described in section
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41568 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41575 \begin_layout Subsection
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41581 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41584 \begin_layout Subsection
41588 \begin_layout Standard
41589 Selects the whole document.
41592 \begin_layout Subsection
41593 Find & Replace (Quick)
41596 \begin_layout Standard
41597 Described in section
41598 \begin_inset space ~
41602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41604 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41611 \begin_layout Subsection
41612 Find & Replace (Advanced)
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41616 Described in section
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41623 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41630 \begin_layout Subsection
41631 Move Paragraph Up/Down
41634 \begin_layout Standard
41635 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41639 \begin_layout Subsection
41641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41647 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41648 Described in section
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41655 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41664 \begin_layout Subsection
41666 \begin_inset Index idx
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 Paragraph ! Settings
41678 \begin_layout Standard
41679 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41680 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41684 \begin_layout Standard
41685 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41686 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41692 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41693 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41701 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41705 \begin_layout Subsection
41707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41714 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41719 \begin_layout Enumerate
41721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41722 Customize text properties by means of the
41728 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41731 ; this is described in section
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41738 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41745 \begin_layout Enumerate
41747 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41748 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41750 Apply last settings
41753 \begin_layout Enumerate
41755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41756 Change the casing of selected text (
41771 \begin_layout Subsection
41773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41777 \begin_layout Standard
41779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41780 This sub-menu only appears
41781 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
41783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41784 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41813 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41822 \begin_layout Subsection
41823 Table and Rows & Columns
41826 \begin_layout Standard
41827 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41828 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41829 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41832 \begin_layout Subsection
41836 \begin_layout Standard
41837 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41838 It will dissolve this inset.
41839 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41843 \begin_layout Subsection
41847 \begin_layout Standard
41848 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41849 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41852 \begin_layout Subsection
41853 Increase/Decrease List Depth
41856 \begin_layout Standard
41857 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41859 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41866 reference "sec:Nesting"
41871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41873 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41880 \begin_layout Section
41882 \begin_inset Index idx
41885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41895 At the bottom of the
41899 menu the opened documents are listed.
41902 \begin_layout Subsection
41903 Open/Close all Insets
41906 \begin_layout Standard
41907 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41910 \begin_layout Subsection
41911 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41914 \begin_layout Standard
41915 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41918 \begin_layout Standard
41919 Math macros are described in the
41926 \begin_layout Subsection
41930 \begin_layout Standard
41931 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41938 reference "sec:Navigating"
41943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41945 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41952 \begin_layout Subsection
41956 \begin_layout Standard
41957 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41959 \begin_inset space ~
41963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41965 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41972 \begin_layout Subsection
41976 \begin_layout Standard
41977 Opens a window showing console messages.
41978 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41983 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41984 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41985 is processing the document.
41988 \begin_layout Subsection
41990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41992 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41997 \begin_inset Index idx
42000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
42012 All toolbars and the
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42033 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42035 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
42037 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
42041 \begin_layout Standard
42043 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42077 \begin_inset space ~
42082 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42085 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
42089 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
42091 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
42105 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
42106 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42115 \begin_layout Standard
42120 state the toolbar is permanently shown
42121 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
42126 state it is never shown
42132 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
42133 or when a certain feature is enabled.
42134 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
42135 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
42136 is inside a formula or table respectively
42137 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
42138 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
42143 \begin_layout Standard
42145 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42152 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42159 \begin_layout Subsection
42163 \begin_layout Standard
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42183 \begin_inset space ~
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42192 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42193 's main window vertically while
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42221 will split it horizontally.
42222 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
42223 to view the same document, but at different positions.
42224 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
42225 three or more documents at the same time.
42226 To close a split view, use the menu
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42241 \begin_layout Subsection
42245 \begin_layout Standard
42246 Closes a split view.
42249 \begin_layout Subsection
42253 \begin_layout Standard
42254 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
42255 so that you will see nothing but your text.
42256 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42257 's main window fullscreen.
42258 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
42259 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42262 \begin_layout Section
42264 \begin_inset Index idx
42267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42276 \begin_layout Subsection
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42281 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42288 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42299 \begin_layout Subsection
42301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42303 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42311 Here you can insert the following characters:
42314 \begin_layout Description
42319 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42322 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42323 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42324 -packages you have installed.
42325 You can get a complete display by checking
42328 \begin_inset space ~
42334 \begin_inset Newline newline
42338 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 Not all characters will be visible in the
42350 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42351 dialog (see section
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42358 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42362 ) can display every character.
42370 \begin_layout Description
42371 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42375 \begin_layout Description
42377 \begin_inset space ~
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42384 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42391 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42398 \begin_layout Description
42400 \begin_inset space ~
42403 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42407 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42413 \begin_layout Description
42415 \begin_inset space ~
42418 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42422 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 \begin_layout Description
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42433 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42437 \begin_layout Description
42439 \begin_inset space ~
42442 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42446 \begin_layout Description
42448 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
42453 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
42459 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42464 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42470 \begin_inset space \space{}
42473 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42474 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42483 To insert a fraction use the command
42488 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42492 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42501 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42508 \begin_layout Description
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42513 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42517 \begin_layout Description
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42523 \begin_inset Index idx
42526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 \begin_inset Index idx
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Language ! Phonetic symbols
42542 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42543 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42545 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42551 \begin_inset Index idx
42554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 \begin_inset Newline newline
42565 More information about this feature can be found in the
42571 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42577 \begin_layout Description
42578 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42580 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42581 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42585 \begin_layout Subsection
42589 \begin_layout Standard
42590 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42593 \begin_layout Description
42594 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42595 \begin_inset script superscript
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 \begin_layout Description
42607 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42608 \begin_inset script subscript
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 \begin_layout Description
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42624 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42631 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42638 \begin_layout Description
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42643 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42650 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42657 \begin_layout Description
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42662 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42669 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42676 \begin_layout Description
42678 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42683 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42689 \begin_inset space \space{}
42692 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42693 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42702 To insert a fraction use the command
42707 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42711 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42720 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42729 \begin_layout Description
42731 \begin_inset space ~
42734 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42735 \begin_inset space ~
42739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42741 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42748 \begin_layout Description
42750 \begin_inset space ~
42753 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42760 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42767 \begin_layout Description
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42772 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42779 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42786 \begin_layout Description
42787 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42794 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42801 \begin_layout Description
42803 \begin_inset space ~
42806 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42807 \begin_inset space ~
42811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42813 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42820 \begin_layout Description
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42825 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42826 \begin_inset space ~
42830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42832 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42839 \begin_layout Description
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42848 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42857 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42864 for a usage example.
42867 \begin_layout Description
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42876 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42883 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42890 \begin_layout Description
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42895 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42896 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42899 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42906 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42913 \begin_layout Description
42915 \begin_inset space ~
42918 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42925 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42932 \begin_layout Description
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42937 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42938 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42946 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42951 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42955 \begin_layout Description
42957 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42959 \begin_inset space ~
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42966 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42967 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42973 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42983 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42992 \begin_layout Description
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42997 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42998 \begin_inset space ~
43002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43004 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43011 \begin_layout Description
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43017 \begin_inset space ~
43020 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
43021 \begin_inset space ~
43025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43027 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43034 \begin_layout Subsection
43036 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43042 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43043 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
43044 The submenu allows you to insert
43047 \begin_layout Description
43049 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43054 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
43057 \begin_layout Description
43059 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43061 \begin_inset space ~
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43068 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
43072 \begin_layout Description
43074 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43079 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
43082 \begin_layout Description
43084 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43089 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
43092 \begin_layout Description
43094 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43100 \begin_inset space ~
43103 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
43107 \begin_layout Description
43109 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43114 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
43117 \begin_layout Description
43119 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
43121 \begin_inset space ~
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset space ~
43132 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
43135 \begin_layout Description
43137 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
43139 \begin_inset space ~
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43146 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
43148 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
43151 \begin_layout Description
43153 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43158 Name inserts the user name as specified in
43160 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43161 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43167 \begin_layout Description
43169 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43174 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
43176 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43177 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43183 \begin_layout Description
43185 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43186 Other\SpecialChar ldots
43187 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
43188 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
43191 \begin_layout Subsection
43194 List/Contents/References
43197 \begin_layout Standard
43198 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43223 are described in section
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43230 reference "sec:toc"
43239 is described in section
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43246 reference "sec:Index"
43254 is described in section
43255 \begin_inset space ~
43259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43261 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43267 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43270 is described in section
43271 \begin_inset space ~
43275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43277 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43284 \begin_layout Subsection
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43289 To insert floats, as described in section
43290 \begin_inset space ~
43294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43296 reference "sec:Floats"
43300 and in detail the chapter
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43315 \begin_layout Subsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 To insert notes, described in section
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43327 reference "sec:Notes"
43334 \begin_layout Subsection
43338 \begin_layout Standard
43339 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
43341 Branches are described in section
43342 \begin_inset space ~
43346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43348 reference "sec:Branches"
43355 \begin_layout Subsection
43359 \begin_layout Standard
43360 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43361 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
43363 An example is the document class
43364 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
43366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43374 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
43378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43383 with three custom insets.
43386 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43390 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
43396 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
43399 \begin_layout Subsection
43401 \begin_inset Index idx
43404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43414 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
43416 For more information see chapter
43418 External Document Parts
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_layout Subsection
43429 \begin_inset Index idx
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43441 \begin_layout Standard
43442 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43443 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_layout Subsection
43462 \begin_layout Standard
43467 dialog as described in section
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43474 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43481 \begin_layout Subsection
43485 \begin_layout Standard
43490 as described in section
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43497 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43504 \begin_layout Subsection
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43513 as described in section
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43520 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43527 \begin_layout Subsection
43529 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43539 \begin_inset Index idx
43542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43543 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
43551 \begin_layout Standard
43552 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43553 Floats are described in section
43554 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43560 reference "sec:Floats"
43564 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43567 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_layout Subsection
43587 \begin_layout Standard
43588 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43595 reference "sec:Index"
43602 \begin_layout Subsection
43606 \begin_layout Standard
43607 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43614 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43621 \begin_layout Subsection
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43626 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43627 Tables are described in section
43628 \begin_inset space ~
43632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43634 reference "sec:Tables"
43638 and in detail in the chapter
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43653 \begin_layout Subsection
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43663 Graphics are described in section
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43670 reference "sec:Graphics"
43677 \begin_layout Subsection
43681 \begin_layout Standard
43682 Inserts a URL as described in section
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43689 reference "subsec:URLs"
43696 \begin_layout Subsection
43700 \begin_layout Standard
43701 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43702 \begin_inset space ~
43706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43708 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43715 \begin_layout Subsection
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43721 \begin_inset space ~
43725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43727 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43734 \begin_layout Subsection
43738 \begin_layout Standard
43739 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43746 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43753 \begin_layout Subsection
43756 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43761 environments of the same type.
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43769 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43773 for an explanation.
43776 \begin_layout Subsection
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43781 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43782 title or caption of a float.
43783 Inserts a short title as described in section
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43790 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43797 \begin_layout Subsection
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43803 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43804 Code box as described in section
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43811 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43818 \begin_layout Subsection
43820 \begin_inset Index idx
43823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 Inserts a program listings box.
43834 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43836 Program Code Listings
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43849 \begin_layout Subsection
43851 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43855 \begin_layout Standard
43857 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43858 Inserts the actual date.
43859 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43866 \begin_layout Subsection
43870 \begin_layout Standard
43871 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43878 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43885 \begin_layout Section
43887 \begin_inset Index idx
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43899 \begin_layout Standard
43900 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 of the current document.
43905 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43908 \begin_layout Subsection
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43913 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43914 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43915 to jump, for example, between section
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43920 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43924 2.5 and use the submenu
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43954 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43958 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43964 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43967 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43972 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
43973 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43984 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43992 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43995 \begin_layout Subsection
43996 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43999 \begin_layout Standard
44000 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
44004 \begin_layout Subsection
44008 \begin_layout Standard
44009 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
44010 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
44011 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_layout Subsection
44031 \begin_layout Standard
44032 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
44035 The \SpecialChar LyX
44036 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44046 \begin_inset space ~
44051 manual for a detailed description.
44054 \begin_layout Section
44056 \begin_inset Index idx
44059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44068 \begin_layout Subsection
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 Change Tracking is described in section
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44080 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44087 \begin_layout Subsection
44095 \begin_layout Standard
44096 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
44097 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
44098 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44100 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
44101 to the clipboard or update the view.
44102 \begin_inset Newline newline
44105 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44109 \begin_layout Standard
44112 Open Containing Directory
44114 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44115 's temporary folder for the document.
44116 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44117 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
44118 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44119 For example some journals require to send the
44123 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44127 \begin_layout Subsection
44128 Start Appendix Here
44131 \begin_layout Standard
44132 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
44133 as described in section
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44140 reference "sec:Appendices"
44147 \begin_layout Subsection
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44156 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
44157 default output format for the document (menu
44159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44160 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44179 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44183 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44192 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44197 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44215 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44219 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44220 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44222 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44223 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44228 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44233 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 \begin_inset space ~
44241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44243 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44248 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44249 when it is first configured.
44250 The default output format is
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44261 \begin_layout Subsection
44262 View (Other Formats)
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44266 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44267 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
44268 actual document with an external program.
44269 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
44270 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44271 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44273 All possible formats are listed in section
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44280 reference "subsec:Export"
44285 You should at least see the menu entry
44290 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44292 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44300 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44305 \begin_inset Index idx
44308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44319 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44320 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44323 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44325 \begin_inset space ~
44328 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44333 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44343 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44348 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44349 when it is first configured.
44352 \begin_layout Subsection
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44360 \begin_layout Standard
44361 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
44362 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44365 \begin_layout Subsection
44366 Update (Other Formats)
44369 \begin_layout Standard
44370 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
44371 your document without opening a new viewer window.
44374 \begin_layout Subsection
44375 View Master Document
44378 \begin_layout Standard
44379 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44400 manual for more information on this topic).
44401 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
44402 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44415 generates the output of the whole book, while
44419 will just output the chapter alone.
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44423 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44424 in the document settings (menu
44426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44427 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44428 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44446 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44450 ) or in the preferences (menu
44452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44458 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44463 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44481 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44488 \begin_layout Subsection
44489 Update Master Document
44492 \begin_layout Standard
44493 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44514 manual for more information on this topic).
44515 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44516 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44519 \begin_layout Standard
44520 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44521 in the document settings (menu
44523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44525 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset space ~
44541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44543 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44547 ) or in the preferences (menu
44549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44550 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44555 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44560 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44572 \begin_inset space ~
44576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44578 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44585 \begin_layout Subsection
44587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44589 name "subsec:Compressed"
44596 \begin_layout Standard
44597 Un/compresses the current document.
44598 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44599 compression (see the
44601 Additional Features
44603 manual for details).
44606 \begin_layout Subsection
44610 \begin_layout Standard
44611 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44614 \begin_layout Subsection
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 The document settings are described in appendix
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44626 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44633 \begin_layout Section
44635 \begin_inset Index idx
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44647 \begin_layout Subsection
44651 \begin_layout Standard
44652 Spell checking is explained in section
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44659 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44666 \begin_layout Subsection
44670 \begin_layout Standard
44671 The thesaurus is described in section
44672 \begin_inset space ~
44676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44678 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44685 \begin_layout Subsection
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 \begin_inset Index idx
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 \begin_layout Standard
44710 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44711 the highlighted document part.
44714 \begin_layout Subsection
44720 \begin_inset Index idx
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44733 \begin_layout Standard
44734 Generates with the help of the program
44736 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44739 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44740 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44741 This feature is not available on Windows.
44744 \begin_layout Subsection
44750 \begin_inset Index idx
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44763 \begin_layout Standard
44764 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44769 \begin_inset space ~
44774 to see the full filename paths.
44777 \begin_layout Subsection
44779 \begin_inset Index idx
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 \begin_layout Standard
44792 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44793 files as described in section
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44800 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44807 \begin_layout Subsection
44809 \begin_inset Index idx
44812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 \begin_inset Index idx
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44847 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44856 \begin_layout Standard
44857 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44858 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44859 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44860 -packages and programs it needs; see
44862 \begin_inset space ~
44866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44868 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44875 \begin_layout Subsection
44879 \begin_layout Standard
44884 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44891 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44898 \begin_layout Section
44900 \begin_inset Index idx
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44912 \begin_layout Standard
44913 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44914 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44916 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44920 \begin_layout Standard
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44929 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44930 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44931 packages and classes found
44932 by \SpecialChar LyX
44934 \begin_inset space ~
44938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44940 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44956 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44961 \begin_layout Section
44963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44965 name "sec:Toolbars"
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44973 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44980 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44988 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44989 This is described in the
44991 Additional Features
44996 \begin_layout Subsection
44998 \begin_inset Index idx
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 \begin_layout Standard
45011 \begin_inset Graphics
45012 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
45020 \begin_layout Standard
45021 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45027 \begin_layout Standard
45028 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45045 \begin_inset Note Note
45048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45054 manual for more information.
45062 \begin_layout Standard
45063 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45069 \begin_layout Standard
45070 \begin_inset Tabular
45071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45072 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45080 \begin_inset Graphics
45081 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45095 pull-down box for the environments
45108 \begin_layout Standard
45109 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45115 \begin_layout Standard
45117 \begin_inset Tabular
45118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
45119 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45120 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45121 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45145 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45175 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45251 arg "spelling-continuously"
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 Spellcheck continuously
45269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45322 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45352 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45414 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
45419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45437 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45519 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45533 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45534 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
45541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 Emphasize text, function of the
45563 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
45566 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45571 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
45579 arg "dialog-show character"
45590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 Set text to noun style, function of the
45612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
45615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45617 \begin_inset space ~
45620 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45622 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
45628 arg "dialog-show character"
45639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45645 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
45648 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
45656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
45664 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45677 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
45682 arg "textstyle-apply"
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45697 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45698 Format text using the current settings in the
45700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45702 \begin_inset space ~
45705 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45740 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45742 \begin_inset space ~
45751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45760 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 arg "tabular-insert"
45796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45818 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 Toggle outline window on/off,
45864 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 Toggle math toolbar on/off
45898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45907 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45932 \begin_layout Subsection
45934 \begin_inset Index idx
45937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 \begin_layout Standard
45947 \begin_inset Graphics
45948 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45956 \begin_layout Standard
45957 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45963 \begin_layout Standard
45964 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45968 \begin_layout Standard
45969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45975 \begin_layout Standard
45976 \begin_inset Tabular
45977 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45978 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45980 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
46025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46044 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
46052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46071 arg "layout-toggle List"
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 arg "layout-toggle Description"
46106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 arg "depth-increment"
46133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46139 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 arg "depth-decrement"
46171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46201 arg "float-insert figure"
46209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46216 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 arg "float-insert table"
46240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46247 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46387 arg "nomencl-insert"
46395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 arg "footnote-insert"
46429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46467 \begin_inset space ~
46476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46500 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46520 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46596 \begin_inset space ~
46605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46629 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46645 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46660 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46662 \begin_inset space ~
46671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46680 arg "dialog-show character"
46688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46699 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46717 arg "textstyle-apply"
46725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46731 Format text using the recent settings in the
46734 arg "dialog-show character"
46743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46752 arg "layout-paragraph"
46760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46786 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46800 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46814 \begin_layout Subsection
46815 View/Update Toolbar
46816 \begin_inset Index idx
46819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46820 Toolbar ! View / Update
46828 \begin_layout Standard
46829 \begin_inset Graphics
46830 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46844 \begin_layout Standard
46845 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46850 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46856 \begin_layout Standard
46857 \begin_inset Tabular
46858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46859 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46860 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46861 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46901 arg "buffer-update"
46909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 arg "master-buffer-view"
46939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46947 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 arg "master-buffer-update"
46981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46989 \begin_inset space ~
46993 \begin_inset space ~
47002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47011 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
47019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47028 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
47030 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
47033 \SpecialChar menuseparator
47034 Synchronize with Output
47040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47051 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
47061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47068 View (Other Formats)
47074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47081 arg "update-others"
47085 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
47093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47100 Update (Other Formats)
47113 \begin_layout Standard
47115 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
47116 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
47122 \begin_layout Subsection
47126 \begin_layout Standard
47127 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47134 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47138 , the table toolbar
47139 \begin_inset Index idx
47142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47156 manual and the math macro toolbar
47157 \begin_inset Index idx
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47173 \begin_layout Chapter
47174 The Document Settings
47175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47177 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47182 \begin_inset Index idx
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47186 Document ! Settings
47194 \begin_layout Standard
47198 \begin_inset space ~
47203 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
47204 is called with the menu
47206 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47210 You can save your document settings as default with the
47212 Save as Document Defaults
47214 button in any dialog.
47215 This will create a template named
47219 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47220 when you create a new document without
47224 \begin_layout Standard
47229 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47230 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47233 \begin_layout Standard
47234 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47235 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
47236 to find the one you are looking for.
47237 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
47238 the submenus of the dialog.
47240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47244 \begin_inset space \space{}
47248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47255 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47256 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47257 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47260 \begin_layout Section
47264 \begin_layout Standard
47265 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
47267 Document classes are described in section
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47274 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47281 \begin_layout Standard
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47290 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47295 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47296 as a layout for a document class.
47297 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
47299 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
47308 \begin_layout Standard
47309 Some classes use special class options by default.
47310 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
47314 and you can decide to use them or not.
47315 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
47316 recommended you leave them untouched.
47321 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47322 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
47327 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47329 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
47334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47335 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47336 \begin_inset Newline newline
47341 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
47344 \begin_inset Newline newline
47347 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47348 distribution, see section
47353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47355 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47368 \begin_layout Standard
47373 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47374 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47375 in the background if the child document
47376 is opened without its master.
47377 This way child documents are always compilable.
47378 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47385 \begin_inset space ~
47393 \begin_layout Standard
47394 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47405 \begin_inset Index idx
47408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47410 packages ! prettyref
47416 \begin_inset Index idx
47419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47421 packages ! refstyle
47426 for cross-references, see section
47427 \begin_inset space ~
47431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47433 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47440 \begin_layout Section
47444 \begin_layout Standard
47445 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47446 Please refer to the section
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47457 \begin_inset space ~
47462 manual for details.
47465 \begin_layout Section
47469 \begin_layout Standard
47470 Modules are explained in section
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47477 reference "subsec:Modules"
47484 \begin_layout Section
47488 \begin_layout Standard
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47496 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47503 \begin_layout Section
47507 \begin_layout Standard
47508 The document font settings are described in section
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47515 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47522 \begin_layout Section
47526 \begin_layout Standard
47527 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47544 and whether it should be a
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47552 can also be specified here.
47555 \begin_layout Standard
47556 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47557 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47558 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47560 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47563 \begin_layout Standard
47566 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47569 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47570 justifies the text on screen.
47571 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47573 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
47577 \begin_layout Standard
47579 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
47588 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
47593 \begin_layout Section
47597 \begin_layout Standard
47598 This dialog is described in sections
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47605 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47612 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47619 \begin_layout Section
47623 \begin_layout Standard
47624 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47631 reference "subsec:Margins"
47638 \begin_layout Section
47640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47642 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47647 \begin_inset Index idx
47650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 Language ! Encoding
47659 \begin_layout Standard
47660 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47661 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47662 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47664 is always encoded in utf8).
47665 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47666 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47667 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47668 -command is not known for
47669 a particular character).
47670 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
47674 \begin_layout Standard
47676 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
47677 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47678 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47679 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
47680 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
47681 's default encoding).
47682 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
47683 's Unicode support covers the
47684 characters of most scripts.
47685 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
47686 using one of the traditional, or
47687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47694 , encodings is necessary.
47697 \begin_layout Standard
47699 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47701 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47704 Traditional (auto-selected)
47710 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47711 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47712 the given language(s).
47714 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47718 \begin_layout Standard
47720 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47721 If you use the option
47726 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47729 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47730 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47733 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47736 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47737 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47738 exactly one encoding.
47739 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47744 \begin_layout Standard
47746 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
47747 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47753 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47754 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47756 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47762 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47763 Finally, you can also select
47767 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47768 Note that this encoding is then used for
47773 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47774 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47778 \begin_layout Standard
47780 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47782 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
47786 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
47787 Do not load inputenc
47788 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47792 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
47794 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
47796 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47798 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
47799 in the next dropdown menu
47800 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47801 does what it states:
47802 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
47804 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
47806 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47807 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47808 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47814 \begin_inset Index idx
47817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47819 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47821 packages ! inputenc
47829 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47830 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47831 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47832 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47833 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47835 Note that this option is only available for the standard
47841 Traditional (auto-selected)
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47850 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
47852 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47853 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47854 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47855 installation supports Unicode), choose
47856 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47857 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47858 is quite incomplete, so
47859 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47864 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47865 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47866 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47867 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47868 -commands is not used, because all
47869 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47870 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47871 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47872 , two new alternative engines
47873 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47875 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47877 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47880 \begin_inset space ~
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47896 \begin_inset space ~
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47908 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47913 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47917 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47922 \begin_layout Standard
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47931 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47932 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47942 The possible settings are:
47945 \begin_layout Description
47946 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47948 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47949 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47953 \begin_inset space ~
47957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47959 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47966 \begin_layout Description
47967 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47968 format you will use.
47969 In many cases this will be
47974 \begin_inset Index idx
47977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47985 If the newer package
47990 \begin_inset Index idx
47993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47995 packages ! polyglossia
48000 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48001 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48002 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
48004 this package will be used instead of
48011 \begin_layout Description
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48024 would be more appropriate.
48027 \begin_layout Description
48028 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
48029 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
48033 (for German texts), type in
48036 \begin_inset Newline newline
48041 usepackage{ngerman}
48044 \begin_layout Description
48045 None will not use a language package.
48046 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
48049 \begin_layout Standard
48050 Here is a list with the important encodings:
48053 \begin_layout Description
48055 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
48057 \begin_inset space ~
48061 \begin_inset space ~
48065 \begin_inset space ~
48072 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48078 \begin_inset Index idx
48081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48083 packages ! inputenc
48089 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48090 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48091 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48097 \begin_layout Description
48098 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
48100 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
48101 commands, which may result in a big
48102 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
48103 -commands are needed.
48105 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
48106 This is the same as the
48119 \begin_layout Description
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48125 \begin_inset space ~
48128 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
48131 \begin_layout Description
48133 \begin_inset space ~
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48140 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
48143 \begin_layout Description
48145 \begin_inset space ~
48148 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
48151 \begin_layout Description
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48157 \begin_inset space ~
48160 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
48161 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
48164 \begin_layout Description
48166 \begin_inset space ~
48170 \begin_inset space ~
48173 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
48177 \begin_layout Description
48179 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_inset space ~
48186 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
48187 ISO-8859-13 encoding
48190 \begin_layout Description
48192 \begin_inset space ~
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48203 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
48204 \begin_inset space ~
48210 \begin_layout Description
48212 \begin_inset space ~
48216 \begin_inset space ~
48220 \begin_inset space ~
48223 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
48224 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
48227 \begin_layout Description
48229 \begin_inset space ~
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48236 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
48237 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
48238 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48239 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48240 \begin_inset space ~
48244 \begin_inset space ~
48250 \begin_layout Description
48252 \begin_inset space ~
48256 \begin_inset space ~
48259 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
48260 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
48261 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48263 should try to use the encoding Unicode
48264 \begin_inset space ~
48268 \begin_inset space ~
48274 \begin_layout Description
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48280 \begin_inset space ~
48283 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48286 \begin_layout Description
48288 \begin_inset space ~
48292 \begin_inset space ~
48295 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48298 \begin_layout Description
48300 \begin_inset space ~
48304 \begin_inset space ~
48307 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
48310 \begin_layout Description
48312 \begin_inset space ~
48315 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48318 \begin_layout Description
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48323 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48326 \begin_layout Description
48328 \begin_inset space ~
48332 \begin_inset space ~
48335 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48338 \begin_layout Description
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48344 \begin_inset space ~
48350 \begin_layout Description
48352 \begin_inset space ~
48356 \begin_inset space ~
48359 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48362 \begin_layout Description
48364 \begin_inset space ~
48368 \begin_inset space ~
48374 \begin_layout Description
48376 \begin_inset space ~
48380 \begin_inset space ~
48383 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48389 \begin_inset Index idx
48392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 , when using this, set the document language to
48404 \begin_layout Description
48406 \begin_inset space ~
48410 \begin_inset space ~
48413 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48418 , when using this, set the document language to
48421 \begin_inset space ~
48427 \begin_layout Description
48429 \begin_inset space ~
48433 \begin_inset space ~
48436 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48442 \begin_inset Index idx
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48447 packages ! japanese
48452 , when using this, set the document language to
48457 \begin_layout Description
48459 \begin_inset space ~
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48466 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48471 , when using this, set the document language to
48476 \begin_layout Description
48478 \begin_inset space ~
48482 \begin_inset space ~
48485 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48490 , when using this, set the document language to
48495 \begin_layout Description
48497 \begin_inset space ~
48500 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48503 \begin_layout Description
48505 \begin_inset space ~
48509 \begin_inset space ~
48513 \begin_inset space ~
48516 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
48519 \begin_layout Description
48521 \begin_inset space ~
48525 \begin_inset space ~
48529 \begin_inset space ~
48532 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
48533 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
48534 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48537 \begin_layout Description
48539 \begin_inset space ~
48543 \begin_inset space ~
48549 \begin_layout Description
48551 \begin_inset space ~
48555 \begin_inset space ~
48558 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
48559 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48562 \begin_layout Description
48564 \begin_inset space ~
48568 \begin_inset space ~
48571 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48577 \begin_inset Index idx
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48587 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48588 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
48590 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48591 with the default encoding (
48593 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48599 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
48600 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48605 \begin_layout Description
48607 \begin_inset space ~
48615 \begin_inset space ~
48618 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48625 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48628 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48635 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48636 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48638 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48641 \begin_layout Description
48643 \begin_inset space ~
48647 \begin_inset space ~
48650 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48656 \begin_inset Index idx
48659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
48670 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48672 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
48673 This used to be more comprehensive than
48676 \begin_inset space ~
48681 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
48686 \begin_layout Description
48688 \begin_inset space ~
48691 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48697 \begin_inset Index idx
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 packages ! inputenc
48709 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
48710 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48712 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
48713 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48714 with the default encoding (
48716 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48722 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48723 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48728 \begin_layout Description
48730 \begin_inset space ~
48734 \begin_inset space ~
48738 \begin_inset space ~
48741 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48742 \begin_inset space ~
48748 \begin_layout Description
48750 \begin_inset space ~
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48758 \begin_inset space ~
48761 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48762 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48763 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48767 \begin_layout Description
48769 \begin_inset space ~
48773 \begin_inset space ~
48777 \begin_inset space ~
48780 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48781 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48784 \begin_layout Section
48786 \begin_inset Index idx
48789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48796 \begin_inset Index idx
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 \begin_inset Index idx
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48810 Color ! Shaded boxes
48816 \begin_inset Index idx
48819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48828 \begin_layout Standard
48829 Here you can alter the font color for the
48833 (default: black), for
48836 \begin_inset space ~
48841 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48845 (default: white) and for
48848 \begin_inset space ~
48858 sets the color back to the default.
48861 \begin_layout Standard
48862 Clicking any button showing
48870 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48871 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48872 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48873 later more quickly.
48876 \begin_layout Standard
48877 Note, if you change the
48880 \begin_inset space ~
48885 font color and use the option
48888 \begin_inset space ~
48893 in the document settings under
48896 \begin_inset space ~
48901 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48902 \begin_inset space ~
48906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48908 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48915 \begin_layout Standard
48916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48922 \begin_layout Standard
48926 \begin_inset space ~
48935 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48938 \begin_inset space ~
48941 Code after a forced page break:
48944 \begin_layout Itemize
48945 For the page color:
48946 \begin_inset Newline newline
48953 pagecolor{color name}
48956 \begin_layout Itemize
48957 For the text color:
48958 \begin_inset Newline newline
48968 \begin_layout Standard
48969 You are restricted to one of
49005 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
49012 \begin_inset space ~
49018 \begin_inset Newline newline
49021 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
49022 names to refer to them:
49025 \begin_layout Itemize
49031 \begin_inset Newline newline
49036 page_backgroundcolor
49039 \begin_layout Itemize
49043 \begin_inset space ~
49049 \begin_inset Newline newline
49057 \begin_layout Itemize
49061 \begin_inset space ~
49067 \begin_inset Newline newline
49075 \begin_layout Itemize
49079 \begin_inset space ~
49085 \begin_inset Newline newline
49093 \begin_layout Standard
49094 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
49097 \begin_inset space ~
49105 \begin_inset space ~
49113 \begin_layout Section
49115 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
49119 \begin_layout Standard
49121 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
49122 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49129 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49137 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
49138 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
49141 \begin_layout Standard
49143 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49144 Additionally, you can advise
49145 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
49148 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
49150 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49151 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
49152 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
49155 \begin_layout Section
49159 \begin_layout Standard
49160 Here you can adjust the
49164 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49168 as described in section
49169 \begin_inset space ~
49173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49175 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49180 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
49184 \begin_layout Standard
49186 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
49187 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
49189 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
49190 this package can be used as well.
49191 The most common one are:
49194 \begin_layout Description
49196 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
49197 right Line numbers to the right margin
49200 \begin_layout Description
49202 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
49203 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
49207 \begin_layout Description
49209 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
49210 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
49213 \begin_layout Description
49215 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
49216 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
49219 \begin_layout Description
49221 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
49222 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
49225 \begin_layout Description
49227 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
49229 \begin_inset space ~
49232 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
49237 \begin_layout Section
49241 \begin_layout Standard
49242 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49248 \begin_inset Index idx
49251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49253 packages ! biblatex
49263 \begin_inset Index idx
49266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49278 \begin_inset Index idx
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49289 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49292 Sectioned bibliography
49294 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49300 \begin_inset Index idx
49303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49305 packages ! bibtopic
49315 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
49316 Finally, you can select a document-specific
49320 for the generation of the bibliography.
49321 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49322 \begin_inset space ~
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49328 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49335 \begin_layout Section
49339 \begin_layout Standard
49340 Here you can define the
49344 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
49346 \begin_inset space ~
49350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49352 reference "sec:Index"
49359 \begin_layout Section
49363 \begin_layout Standard
49364 The PDF properties are explained in section
49365 \begin_inset space ~
49369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49371 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49378 \begin_layout Section
49382 \begin_layout Standard
49383 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49384 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49390 \begin_inset Index idx
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49405 \begin_inset Index idx
49408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49420 \begin_inset Index idx
49423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49435 \begin_inset Index idx
49438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49450 \begin_inset Index idx
49453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49455 packages ! mathdots
49465 \begin_inset Index idx
49468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49470 packages ! mathtools
49480 \begin_inset Index idx
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49495 \begin_inset Index idx
49498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49500 packages ! stackrel
49510 \begin_inset Index idx
49513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49515 packages ! stmaryrd
49525 \begin_inset Index idx
49528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49530 packages ! undertilde
49535 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49538 \begin_layout Description
49539 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49540 -errors in formulas,
49541 ensure that you have this enabled.
49544 \begin_layout Description
49545 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
49546 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49547 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
49551 \begin_layout Description
49552 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
49555 \begin_inset space ~
49567 \begin_layout Description
49568 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
49571 \begin_inset space ~
49583 \begin_layout Description
49584 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
49595 \begin_layout Description
49596 mathtools is used for the math commands
49632 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
49639 \begin_layout Description
49640 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49642 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49651 \begin_layout Description
49652 stackrel is used for the math command
49669 \begin_layout Description
49670 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49673 \begin_layout Description
49674 undertilde is used for the math command
49682 Accents for one Character
49691 \begin_layout Section
49693 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
49695 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
49701 \begin_layout Standard
49703 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
49704 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
49707 \begin_layout Standard
49709 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
49710 The float placement options
49711 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
49714 are described in the section
49717 \begin_inset space ~
49721 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
49723 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49731 \begin_inset space ~
49739 \begin_layout Section
49743 \begin_layout Standard
49744 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49746 Program Code Listings
49751 \begin_inset space ~
49759 \begin_layout Section
49763 \begin_layout Standard
49764 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49772 set to be used and set the
49777 The itemize environment is described in section
49778 \begin_inset space ~
49782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49784 reference "sec:Itemize"
49791 \begin_layout Standard
49792 You can furthermore specify a
49795 \begin_inset space ~
49800 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49801 command of the desired character.
49802 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49809 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49815 \begin_inset space \space{}
49819 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49829 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49830 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49833 \begin_layout Standard
49834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49842 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49843 -packages in the preamble (menu
49846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49847 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49856 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49860 usepackage{textcomp}
49863 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49867 usepackage{amssymb}
49877 \begin_layout Section
49881 \begin_layout Standard
49882 Branches are described in section
49883 \begin_inset space ~
49887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49889 reference "sec:Branches"
49896 \begin_layout Section
49898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49900 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49907 \begin_layout Standard
49908 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49911 \begin_layout Description
49913 \begin_inset space ~
49917 \begin_inset space ~
49920 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49940 View Master Document
49941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49948 Update Master Document
49949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49956 menu or the toolbar.
49957 The default is set in
49959 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49960 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49962 \begin_inset space ~
49965 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49982 \begin_layout Description
49984 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49986 \begin_inset space ~
49990 \begin_inset space ~
49994 \begin_inset space ~
49997 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
50002 option which is needed with some packages.
50003 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
50004 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
50007 \begin_layout Description
50009 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
50011 \begin_inset space ~
50015 \begin_inset space ~
50018 Options offers settings for the
50026 \begin_layout Itemize
50030 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
50032 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
50034 \begin_inset space ~
50040 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
50042 \begin_inset space ~
50046 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
50052 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
50054 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
50055 settings for the menu
50057 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50061 \begin_inset space ~
50065 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
50068 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
50069 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
50074 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50076 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
50078 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50081 or a detailed description see section
50083 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50088 \begin_inset space ~
50094 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
50098 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
50102 \begin_layout Itemize
50104 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
50107 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
50109 determines whether so-called
50110 \begin_inset Quotes els
50114 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50118 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
50120 \begin_inset Quotes els
50124 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50127 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
50128 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
50129 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
50131 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
50133 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
50134 macros, you can uncheck this.
50135 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
50142 \begin_layout Description
50144 \begin_inset space ~
50148 \begin_inset space ~
50151 Options offers settings for the export format
50159 \begin_inset space ~
50164 will assure that the output follows exactly version
50165 \begin_inset space ~
50168 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
50172 \begin_inset space ~
50177 settings are described in detail in section
50179 Math Output in XHTML
50184 \begin_inset space ~
50193 \begin_inset space ~
50197 \begin_inset space ~
50202 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50205 \begin_layout Description
50207 \begin_inset space ~
50212 Save transient properties
50214 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
50215 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50216 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50220 \begin_layout Itemize
50221 the activation of change tracking
50224 \begin_layout Itemize
50225 the output of tracked changes
50228 \begin_layout Itemize
50229 the recording of the document directory path.
50232 \begin_layout Standard
50233 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
50234 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50238 \begin_layout Section
50246 \begin_layout Standard
50247 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50249 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50251 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50253 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
50257 \begin_layout Standard
50258 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50259 -syntax is given in section
50260 \begin_inset space ~
50264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50266 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50273 \begin_layout Chapter
50279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50281 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50286 \begin_inset Index idx
50289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50298 \begin_layout Standard
50299 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50301 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50305 It has the following submenus.
50308 \begin_layout Section
50312 \begin_layout Subsection
50316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50317 User Interface File
50318 \begin_inset Index idx
50321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50322 Customization ! of toolbars
50328 \begin_inset Index idx
50331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50332 Customization ! of menus
50340 \begin_layout Standard
50341 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
50342 interface (ui) file.
50343 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50351 \begin_layout Description
50356 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50359 \begin_layout Description
50366 the menu entries in popup context menus
50369 \begin_layout Description
50374 specifies the toolbar buttons
50377 \begin_layout Standard
50378 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
50379 and edit the entries.
50382 \begin_layout Standard
50383 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
50395 entries must be finished with an explicit
50420 and in the case of the
50421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50433 The syntax for the entries is:
50436 \begin_layout Standard
50437 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50466 \begin_layout Standard
50468 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50471 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50472 -functions are listed in the menu
50474 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50476 \begin_inset space ~
50484 \begin_layout Standard
50485 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50491 \begin_layout Standard
50492 For example, assuming you use the menu
50494 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50497 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
50501 \begin_layout Standard
50502 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50526 \begin_layout Standard
50528 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50543 to have the sixth bookmark.
50546 \begin_layout Standard
50550 \begin_inset space ~
50555 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50556 's toolbar buttons.
50557 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50558 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50561 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50573 \begin_layout Standard
50576 Enable tool tips in main work area
50578 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
50582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50586 \begin_layout Standard
50591 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50592 should display in the menu
50594 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50596 \begin_inset space ~
50604 \begin_layout Subsection
50608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50612 \begin_layout Standard
50615 Restore window layouts and geometries
50618 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
50619 the last \SpecialChar LyX
50623 \begin_layout Standard
50626 Restore cursor positions
50628 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
50632 \begin_layout Standard
50635 Load opened files from last session
50637 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50641 \begin_layout Standard
50644 Clear all session information
50646 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50647 sessions (cursor positions, names
50648 of last opened documents, etc.).
50651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50655 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50660 \begin_inset Index idx
50663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50672 \begin_layout Standard
50675 Backup original documents when saving
50677 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
50678 it was saved the last time.
50679 It is stored in the
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50688 \begin_inset space ~
50692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50694 reference "sec:Paths"
50698 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50701 \begin_inset space ~
50707 The backup file has the file extension
50708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50722 \begin_layout Standard
50725 Backup documents, every
50727 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50730 \begin_layout Standard
50733 Save documents compressed by default
50735 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50736 \begin_inset space ~
50740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50742 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50747 This applies to newly created documents only.
50748 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50752 Windows & work area
50755 \begin_layout Standard
50758 Open documents in tabs
50760 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50764 \begin_layout Standard
50769 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50776 \begin_inset space ~
50780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50782 reference "sec:Paths"
50786 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50793 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50794 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50795 of \SpecialChar LyX
50797 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50798 instance is created for each file.
50801 \begin_layout Standard
50804 Single close-tab button
50806 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50816 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50817 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50818 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50822 \begin_layout Standard
50823 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50831 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50832 before the change takes effect.
50840 \begin_layout Standard
50845 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50847 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50849 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50853 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50854 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50855 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50858 \begin_layout Subsection
50860 \begin_inset Index idx
50863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50872 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50879 \begin_layout Standard
50880 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50884 \begin_layout Standard
50885 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50893 This section only deals with the fonts
50897 the \SpecialChar LyX
50899 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50914 \begin_layout Standard
50915 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50932 (depends on the system) as its
50935 \begin_inset space ~
50951 \begin_layout Standard
50952 You can change the font size with the
50959 \begin_layout Standard
50964 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50969 points have the size of 1
50970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50974 \begin_inset space ~
50978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50980 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50985 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50990 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50991 \begin_inset space ~
50995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50997 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
51004 \begin_layout Subsection
51006 \begin_inset Index idx
51009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51010 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
51017 \begin_inset Index idx
51020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51029 \begin_layout Standard
51030 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
51031 by choosing an item in the
51032 list and selecting the
51039 \begin_layout Standard
51040 By checking the option
51044 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
51047 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
51048 \begin_inset space ~
51052 \begin_inset space ~
51057 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
51060 \begin_layout Subsection
51062 \begin_inset Index idx
51065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51074 \begin_layout Standard
51075 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51079 \begin_layout Standard
51084 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51085 This feature is described in section
51086 \begin_inset space ~
51090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51092 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51099 \begin_layout Standard
51100 Checking the option
51103 \begin_inset space ~
51107 \begin_inset space ~
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51116 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51119 \begin_layout Section
51121 \begin_inset Index idx
51124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51133 \begin_layout Subsection
51137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51141 \begin_layout Standard
51144 Cursor follows scrollbar
51146 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
51150 \begin_layout Standard
51151 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51152 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
51153 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51156 \begin_layout Standard
51159 Scroll below end of document
51161 is self-explanatory.
51164 \begin_layout Standard
51165 In \SpecialChar LyX
51166 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51173 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51175 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51176 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51177 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
51181 \begin_layout Standard
51183 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
51186 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
51188 is only relevant in documents that
51193 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
51202 markup) with this option selected.
51203 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
51205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51209 \begin_inset Quotes els
51213 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51217 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
51218 dissolving from insets.
51223 track changes, pasted text is
51228 \begin_inset Quotes els
51232 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51235 notwithstanding the state of this option.
51240 \begin_layout Standard
51243 Sort environments alphabetically
51245 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51248 \begin_layout Standard
51251 Group environments by their category
51253 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51256 \begin_layout Standard
51261 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
51270 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
51274 \begin_layout Standard
51276 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51279 Search drive for cited files
51281 allows \SpecialChar LyX
51282 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
51285 \begin_inset space ~
51289 \begin_inset space ~
51293 \begin_inset space ~
51297 \begin_inset space ~
51300 Content\SpecialChar ldots
51303 context menu on a citation.
51307 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
51309 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51312 field determines the search pattern.
51314 \begin_inset space ~
51318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51320 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
51329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51333 \begin_layout Standard
51334 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51339 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51340 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
51344 \begin_layout Subsection
51346 \begin_inset Index idx
51349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51356 \begin_inset Index idx
51359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51360 Settings ! Shortcuts
51368 \begin_layout Standard
51373 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51375 Several binding files are available, among them:
51378 \begin_layout Description
51379 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51382 \begin_layout Description
51383 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
51395 \begin_layout Description
51396 mac.bind a set of bindings for
51399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51407 \begin_layout Standard
51408 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
51413 , and binding files for special languages.
51414 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
51415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51419 \begin_inset space \space{}
51423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51431 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
51432 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
51433 will try to use the appropriate binding
51437 \begin_layout Standard
51438 Some binding files, like
51442 , only have a limited scope.
51443 When looking at the end of the file
51447 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51450 \begin_layout Standard
51454 \begin_inset space ~
51458 \begin_inset space ~
51463 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
51464 in the selected key binding file.
51467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51471 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51476 \begin_inset Index idx
51479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51480 Key Bindings ! Editing
51488 \begin_layout Standard
51489 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
51490 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51491 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51492 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
51495 Show key-bindings containing
51498 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51499 Insert there for example as keyword
51500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51507 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
51508 functions that contain
51509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51517 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
51518 All \SpecialChar LyX
51519 functions are also listed in the file
51524 that you will find in the
51531 \begin_layout Standard
51532 For example, to add the shortcut
51540 , select the function and press the
51545 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51546 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51549 \begin_layout Standard
51550 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51551 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51556 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
51558 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
51563 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
51566 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
51570 \begin_layout Standard
51571 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
51574 \begin_layout Standard
51575 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
51577 The syntax of the entries is:
51580 \begin_layout Standard
51586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51605 \begin_layout Standard
51606 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51607 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51635 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51636 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
51637 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
51638 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
51640 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51644 , you needed to specify it as
51649 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
51652 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51655 \begin_layout Subsection
51657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51659 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51664 \begin_inset Index idx
51667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51674 \begin_inset Index idx
51677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51678 Settings ! Keyboard Map
51686 \begin_layout Standard
51687 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51688 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
51689 provides keyboard maps.
51690 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
51691 is a Romanian one, you can enable
51694 \begin_inset space ~
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51703 and select the keyboard map file named
51710 \begin_layout Standard
51719 keyboard map and, if you use the
51723 bindings, you can select the first and second with
51726 arg "keymap-primary"
51732 arg "keymap-secondary"
51735 respectively or toggle between them with
51738 arg "keymap-toggle"
51744 \begin_layout Standard
51745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51753 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51762 \begin_layout Standard
51763 You can also specify the mouse
51765 Wheel scrolling speed
51768 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51772 Middle mouse button pasting
51774 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51775 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51778 \begin_layout Standard
51786 \begin_inset space ~
51790 \begin_inset space ~
51795 you can select a key for zooming.
51796 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51799 \begin_layout Subsection
51803 \begin_layout Standard
51804 Input completion is described in section
51805 \begin_inset space ~
51809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51811 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51818 \begin_layout Section
51820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51827 \begin_inset Index idx
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51837 \begin_inset Index idx
51840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51849 \begin_layout Standard
51850 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51851 are normally determined during
51853 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51856 \begin_layout Description
51858 \begin_inset space ~
51861 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51862 's working directory.
51863 It is the default when you
51874 \begin_inset space ~
51882 \begin_layout Description
51884 \begin_inset space ~
51887 templates This directory
51888 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
51889 contains the templates that are shown
51890 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
51891 will be opened when you use the menu
51892 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
51897 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51899 \begin_inset space ~
51903 \begin_inset space ~
51911 \begin_layout Description
51913 \begin_inset space ~
51916 files This directory
51917 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
51918 will be opened when you use the
51919 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
51920 contains the example files that are listed in
51923 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
51932 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51934 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
51936 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51942 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51944 \begin_inset Newline newline
51948 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51961 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51971 \begin_layout Description
51973 \begin_inset space ~
51977 \begin_inset Index idx
51980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51986 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51987 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51988 \begin_inset space ~
51992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51994 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52002 will be used to save the backups.
52003 \begin_inset Newline newline
52006 Backup files have the ending
52007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52017 \begin_layout Description
52019 \begin_inset space ~
52022 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
52023 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
52025 \begin_inset Newline newline
52032 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52038 You can edit this file with the program
52047 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
52048 in its preferences under
52051 \begin_inset space ~
52057 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
52062 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
52064 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
52065 in your \SpecialChar LyX
52071 and \SpecialChar LyX
52072 need to be running the same time.
52073 \begin_inset Newline newline
52076 The pipe is also used for the
52080 feature, see section
52081 \begin_inset space ~
52085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52087 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52092 \begin_inset Newline newline
52095 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52096 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
52097 \begin_inset Newline newline
52113 \begin_layout Description
52115 \begin_inset space ~
52118 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52121 \begin_layout Description
52123 \begin_inset space ~
52126 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52127 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
52128 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52131 \begin_layout Description
52133 \begin_inset space ~
52136 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52142 You only need to specify it if you are using
52146 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
52148 For \SpecialChar LyX
52153 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
52157 \begin_layout Description
52159 \begin_inset space ~
52162 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52163 When \SpecialChar LyX
52164 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
52165 to find it on the system.
52166 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52168 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
52170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52177 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
52178 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52181 \begin_layout Description
52183 \begin_inset space ~
52186 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
52187 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52188 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52189 code or in the document
52191 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
52193 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
52194 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52195 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
52196 scanned for the input files.
52197 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
52198 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52200 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
52201 compilation may fail for some documents.
52204 \begin_layout Section
52208 \begin_layout Standard
52209 Here you can insert your
52218 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
52220 \begin_inset space ~
52224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52226 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52230 , to mark changes you make as yours.
52233 \begin_layout Section
52235 \begin_inset Index idx
52238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52239 Language ! Settings
52245 \begin_inset Index idx
52248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52249 Settings ! Language
52257 \begin_layout Subsection
52259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52261 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52268 \begin_layout Description
52270 \begin_inset space ~
52274 \begin_inset space ~
52277 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52279 You can find its actual translation status here:
52280 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52282 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52288 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
52292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52294 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
52295 LaTeX Language Support
52300 \begin_layout Description
52302 \begin_inset space ~
52305 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52306 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52307 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
52308 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52325 The most widespread language package is
52330 \begin_inset Index idx
52333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52340 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52342 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52343 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52344 come with the alternative
52350 \begin_inset Index idx
52353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52355 packages ! polyglossia
52360 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52361 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
52367 The available selections are described in section
52368 \begin_inset space ~
52372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52374 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52381 \begin_layout Description
52383 \begin_inset space ~
52387 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
52388 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52389 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52391 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
52395 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
52399 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
52401 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
52405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
52406 that is used to switch to a different language
52407 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
52408 to start the package
52412 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
52413 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
52417 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
52418 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
52421 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52433 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
52441 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
52444 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
52446 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52468 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52469 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52476 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
52477 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52482 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52487 , this setting is ignored.
52492 \begin_layout Description
52494 \begin_inset space ~
52498 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
52505 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
52506 Use this if the language switch set in
52510 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
52514 's alternative command
52518 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
52519 \SpecialChar allowbreak
52522 end{otherlanguage*}
52526 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
52527 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
52528 command toggles the package on and off
52529 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
52530 Empty by default, as
52534 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52536 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
52541 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52547 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
52552 , this setting is ignored.
52557 \begin_layout Description
52559 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52561 \begin_inset space ~
52565 \begin_inset space ~
52568 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
52572 \begin_layout Description
52574 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52576 \begin_inset space ~
52580 \begin_inset space ~
52583 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52589 \begin_layout Description
52591 \begin_inset space ~
52595 \begin_inset space ~
52599 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
52601 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
52604 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
52605 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
52608 to the document class options
52609 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
52610 rather than the language package options.
52611 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
52615 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
52616 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52618 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
52619 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
52621 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
52626 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
52627 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52636 \begin_layout Description
52638 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
52640 \begin_inset space ~
52644 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
52646 \begin_inset space ~
52650 \begin_inset space ~
52654 \begin_inset space ~
52660 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
52662 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
52665 this option is set,
52666 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
52667 the language switch defined in
52670 \begin_inset space ~
52675 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
52676 to the document language.
52677 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
52678 This might be needed if you use a non-default
52681 \begin_inset space ~
52686 or if a package resets the document language.
52687 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
52688 usually should be the document language).
52689 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
52690 documents start with the chosen document language.
52691 When this option is not set, the
52694 \begin_inset space ~
52699 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52701 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52704 \begin_inset space ~
52714 \begin_layout Description
52716 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
52718 \begin_inset space ~
52722 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
52724 \begin_inset space ~
52728 \begin_inset space ~
52732 \begin_inset space ~
52738 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52742 \begin_inset space ~
52746 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52747 Set document language explicitly
52753 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52755 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52761 \begin_inset space ~
52767 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52769 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52773 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52775 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52778 the end of the document.
52779 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52784 \paragraph_spacing single
52786 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52792 \begin_layout Description
52794 \begin_inset space ~
52798 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52800 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52804 \begin_inset space ~
52808 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52810 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52812 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52816 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52819 in a language different
52820 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52822 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52825 the document language will be
52826 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52827 marked (by default with a blue
52830 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52832 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52836 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
52840 \begin_layout Description
52842 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
52844 \begin_inset space ~
52848 \begin_inset space ~
52852 \begin_inset space ~
52855 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
52856 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
52857 switched via the operating system.
52858 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
52860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52863 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
52864 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
52869 \begin_layout Description
52871 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
52873 \begin_inset space ~
52877 \begin_inset space ~
52880 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
52881 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
52886 \begin_layout Description
52888 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52890 \begin_inset space ~
52894 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
52896 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52900 \begin_inset space ~
52904 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
52905 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
52906 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
52908 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
52912 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
52914 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
52915 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
52917 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52918 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
52919 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
52921 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
52926 \begin_layout Standard
52931 means that the cursor
52932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
52933 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
52934 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
52936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52939 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
52940 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52944 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52946 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52947 specific case always means: move
52951 in text (even if this means:
52957 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52958 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52959 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52960 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52961 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52973 \begin_layout Standard
52975 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52980 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52981 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52982 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52986 ) when coming from the left.
52987 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52989 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52990 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52991 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52998 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
53002 \begin_layout Description
53004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
53006 \begin_inset space ~
53010 \begin_inset space ~
53013 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
53014 separator alignment).
53015 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
53017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53020 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
53021 (static) custom character here.
53024 \begin_layout Description
53026 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
53028 \begin_inset space ~
53032 \begin_inset space ~
53035 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53041 \begin_layout Subsection
53045 \begin_layout Standard
53046 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
53047 \begin_inset space ~
53051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53053 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
53060 \begin_layout Section
53064 \begin_layout Subsection
53066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53068 name "subsec:General-output"
53075 \begin_layout Description
53077 \begin_inset space ~
53080 search Commands that will be used for the menu
53082 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53084 \begin_inset space ~
53090 For a detailed description see section
53092 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53097 \begin_inset space ~
53105 \begin_layout Description
53107 \begin_inset space ~
53110 Options Options for the program
53114 that is used for the export format
53119 \begin_inset space ~
53123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53125 reference "subsec:Export"
53130 Possible options are listed in the
53135 \begin_inset Newline newline
53139 \begin_inset Flex URL
53142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53144 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
53154 \begin_layout Description
53156 \begin_inset space ~
53160 \begin_inset space ~
53163 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
53166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53167 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
53169 \begin_inset space ~
53175 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
53178 \begin_layout Description
53180 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
53182 \begin_inset space ~
53186 \begin_inset Index idx
53189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53196 \begin_inset Index idx
53199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53200 Settings ! Date format
53205 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
53206 \begin_inset Newline newline
53210 \begin_inset Flex URL
53213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53215 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
53221 \begin_inset Newline newline
53224 For example the format
53225 \begin_inset Newline newline
53229 \begin_inset Newline newline
53232 prints the date as day/month/year.
53237 \begin_layout Description
53239 \begin_inset space ~
53243 \begin_inset space ~
53246 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
53247 is allowed to overwrite on export.
53250 \begin_layout Subsection
53256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53258 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
53263 \begin_inset Index idx
53266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53267 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
53276 \begin_layout Description
53278 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
53280 \begin_inset space ~
53288 \begin_inset space ~
53292 \begin_inset space ~
53295 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
53300 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
53321 are used for Cyrillic.
53322 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
53323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53335 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
53337 sets up in the background.
53338 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
53343 \begin_layout Description
53345 \begin_inset space ~
53349 \begin_inset space ~
53353 \begin_inset space ~
53357 \begin_inset space ~
53360 options They only have an effect when the program
53364 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
53367 \begin_layout Standard
53368 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
53369 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
53370 manuals of the applications.
53373 \begin_layout Description
53375 \begin_inset space ~
53378 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
53379 \begin_inset space ~
53383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53385 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
53392 \begin_layout Description
53394 \begin_inset space ~
53397 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
53398 \begin_inset space ~
53402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53404 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
53411 \begin_layout Description
53413 \begin_inset space ~
53416 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
53417 \begin_inset space ~
53421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53423 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
53430 \begin_layout Description
53436 \begin_inset space ~
53439 command Command for the program
53441 Check\SpecialChar TeX
53444 that is described in the section
53446 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
53451 Additional Features
53456 \begin_layout Standard
53457 There are additionally the following options:
53460 \begin_layout Description
53462 \begin_inset space ~
53466 \begin_inset space ~
53470 \begin_inset space ~
53474 \begin_inset space ~
53479 \begin_inset space ~
53482 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
53483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53500 to separate folders.
53501 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53503 \begin_inset Index idx
53506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53513 \begin_inset Index idx
53516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53525 \begin_layout Description
53527 \begin_inset space ~
53531 \begin_inset space ~
53535 \begin_inset space ~
53539 \begin_inset space ~
53543 \begin_inset space ~
53547 \begin_inset space ~
53550 changes Removes all manually set
53556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53559 \begin_inset space ~
53564 dialog when changing the document class.
53567 \begin_layout Section
53569 \begin_inset space ~
53573 \begin_inset Index idx
53576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53585 \begin_layout Subsection
53587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53589 name "subsec:Converters"
53594 \begin_inset Index idx
53597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53606 \begin_layout Standard
53607 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
53608 from one format to another.
53609 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53610 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
53617 \begin_inset space ~
53622 field and press the
53627 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
53631 \begin_inset space ~
53636 drop-down list, modify the
53640 field and press the
53647 \begin_layout Standard
53650 Converter File Cache
53656 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53658 Maximum Age (in days
53661 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
53662 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53665 \begin_layout Standard
53666 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
53667 definition, is described in the section
53678 \begin_layout Subsection
53680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53682 name "sec:File-Formats"
53687 \begin_inset Index idx
53690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53697 \begin_inset Index idx
53700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53709 \begin_layout Standard
53710 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53720 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53723 \begin_layout Standard
53724 You can also define the
53726 Default output format
53728 that is used when you use
53730 View, Update, View Master Document
53734 Update Master Document
53740 menu or the toolbar.
53743 \begin_layout Standard
53744 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53755 \begin_layout Standard
53756 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53758 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53759 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53760 This is done by specifying a
53765 More about this is described in the section
53776 \begin_layout Chapter
53777 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53779 \begin_inset Index idx
53782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53791 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53798 \begin_layout Standard
53800 \begin_inset space ~
53804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53806 reference "tab:Units"
53810 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53811 and used in this documentation.
53814 \begin_layout Standard
53815 \begin_inset Float table
53822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53823 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53841 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53849 \begin_inset Tabular
53850 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53851 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53853 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54007 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
54011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54278 scaled point (65536
54279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54346 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
54351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54470 % of original image width
54475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54559 \begin_layout Standard
54560 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54563 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
54570 \begin_layout Bibliography
54571 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54572 LatexCommand bibitem
54579 The \SpecialChar LyX
54581 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54584 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54590 \begin_inset Newline newline
54594 \begin_inset Flex URL
54597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54599 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54607 \begin_layout Bibliography
54608 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54609 LatexCommand bibitem
54610 key "latexcompanion"
54615 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54617 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54618 Companion Second Edition.
54621 Addison-Wesley, 2004
54624 \begin_layout Bibliography
54625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54626 LatexCommand bibitem
54632 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54635 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54639 Addison-Wesley, 2003
54642 \begin_layout Bibliography
54643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54644 LatexCommand bibitem
54653 : A Document Preparation System.
54656 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
54659 \begin_layout Bibliography
54660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54661 LatexCommand bibitem
54671 The \SpecialChar TeX
54675 Addison-Wesley, 1984
54678 \begin_layout Bibliography
54679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54680 LatexCommand bibitem
54686 The \SpecialChar TeX
54688 \begin_inset Newline newline
54692 \begin_inset Flex URL
54695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54697 https://ctan.org/topic
54705 \begin_layout Bibliography
54706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54707 LatexCommand bibitem
54713 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54715 \begin_inset Newline newline
54719 \begin_inset Flex URL
54722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54724 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54732 \begin_layout Bibliography
54733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54734 LatexCommand bibitem
54741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54743 name "Documentation"
54744 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54751 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54755 \begin_inset Newline newline
54759 \begin_inset Flex URL
54762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54764 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54772 \begin_layout Bibliography
54773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54774 LatexCommand bibitem
54781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54783 name "Documentation"
54784 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54789 how to use the program
54791 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54795 \begin_inset Newline newline
54799 \begin_inset Flex URL
54802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54804 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54812 \begin_layout Bibliography
54813 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54814 LatexCommand bibitem
54821 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54823 name "Documentation"
54824 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54829 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54835 \begin_inset Index idx
54838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54840 packages ! biblatex
54846 \begin_inset Newline newline
54850 \begin_inset Flex URL
54853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54855 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54863 \begin_layout Bibliography
54864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54865 LatexCommand bibitem
54872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54874 name "Documentation"
54875 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54880 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54886 \begin_inset Index idx
54889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54897 \begin_inset Newline newline
54901 \begin_inset Flex URL
54904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54906 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54914 \begin_layout Bibliography
54915 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54916 LatexCommand bibitem
54923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54925 name "Documentation"
54926 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54936 \begin_inset Newline newline
54940 \begin_inset Flex URL
54943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54945 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54953 \begin_layout Bibliography
54954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54955 LatexCommand bibitem
54956 key "makeindex-man"
54962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54965 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54975 \begin_inset Newline newline
54979 \begin_inset Flex URL
54982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54984 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54992 \begin_layout Bibliography
54993 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54994 LatexCommand bibitem
55001 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55003 name "Documentation"
55004 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
55014 \begin_inset Newline newline
55018 \begin_inset Flex URL
55021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55023 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
55031 \begin_layout Bibliography
55032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55033 LatexCommand bibitem
55040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55042 name "Documentation"
55043 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
55048 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
55050 \begin_inset Newline newline
55054 \begin_inset Flex URL
55057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55059 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
55067 \begin_layout Bibliography
55068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55069 LatexCommand bibitem
55076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55078 name "Documentation"
55079 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
55084 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55090 \begin_inset Index idx
55093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55101 \begin_inset Newline newline
55105 \begin_inset Flex URL
55108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55110 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
55118 \begin_layout Bibliography
55119 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55120 LatexCommand bibitem
55127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55129 name "Documentation"
55130 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
55135 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55141 \begin_inset Index idx
55144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55146 packages ! enumitem
55152 \begin_inset Newline newline
55156 \begin_inset Flex URL
55159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55161 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
55169 \begin_layout Bibliography
55170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55171 LatexCommand bibitem
55178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55180 name "Documentation"
55181 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
55186 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55192 \begin_inset Index idx
55195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55197 packages ! fancyhdr
55203 \begin_inset Newline newline
55207 \begin_inset Flex URL
55210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55212 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
55220 \begin_layout Bibliography
55221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55222 LatexCommand bibitem
55229 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55231 name "Documentation"
55232 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
55237 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55243 \begin_inset Index idx
55246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55248 packages ! hyperref
55254 \begin_inset Newline newline
55258 \begin_inset Flex URL
55261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55263 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
55271 \begin_layout Bibliography
55272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55273 LatexCommand bibitem
55280 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55282 name "Documentation"
55283 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
55288 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55294 \begin_inset Index idx
55297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55299 packages ! microtype
55305 \begin_inset Newline newline
55309 \begin_inset Flex URL
55312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55314 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
55322 \begin_layout Bibliography
55323 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55324 LatexCommand bibitem
55331 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55333 name "Documentation"
55334 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
55339 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55345 \begin_inset Index idx
55348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55356 \begin_inset Newline newline
55360 \begin_inset Flex URL
55363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55365 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
55373 \begin_layout Bibliography
55374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55375 LatexCommand bibitem
55382 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55384 name "Documentation"
55385 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
55390 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55396 \begin_inset Index idx
55399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55401 packages ! prettyref
55407 \begin_inset Newline newline
55411 \begin_inset Flex URL
55414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55416 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
55424 \begin_layout Bibliography
55425 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55426 LatexCommand bibitem
55433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55435 name "Documentation"
55436 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
55441 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55447 \begin_inset Index idx
55450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55452 packages ! refstyle
55458 \begin_inset Newline newline
55462 \begin_inset Flex URL
55465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55467 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55475 \begin_layout Bibliography
55476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55477 LatexCommand bibitem
55484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55487 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55492 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55494 \begin_inset Newline newline
55498 \begin_inset Flex URL
55501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55503 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55511 \begin_layout Bibliography
55512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55513 LatexCommand bibitem
55520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55523 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55528 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55530 \begin_inset Newline newline
55534 \begin_inset Flex URL
55537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55539 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55547 \begin_layout Bibliography
55548 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55549 LatexCommand bibitem
55556 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55559 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55564 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55565 for Cyrillic languages:
55566 \begin_inset Newline newline
55570 \begin_inset Flex URL
55573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55575 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55583 \begin_layout Bibliography
55584 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55585 LatexCommand bibitem
55592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55595 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55600 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55602 \begin_inset Newline newline
55606 \begin_inset Flex URL
55609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55611 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55619 \begin_layout Bibliography
55620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55621 LatexCommand bibitem
55628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55631 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55636 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55638 \begin_inset Newline newline
55642 \begin_inset Flex URL
55645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55647 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55655 \begin_layout Bibliography
55656 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55657 LatexCommand bibitem
55664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55667 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55672 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55674 \begin_inset Newline newline
55678 \begin_inset Flex URL
55681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55683 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55691 \begin_layout Standard
55692 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55726 \begin_inset Note Note
55729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55736 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55737 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55738 bibliography is the second one:
55746 \begin_layout Standard
55747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55748 LatexCommand bibtex
55749 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55750 options "biblio/alphadin"
55757 \begin_layout Standard
55758 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55762 \begin_layout Standard
55766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55772 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55781 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55789 \begin_inset Note Note
55792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55793 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55794 \begin_inset space ~
55798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55800 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55812 \begin_layout Standard
55813 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55814 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55820 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55821 LatexCommand printindex